summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2022-05-13 21:37:05 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2022-05-13 21:37:05 +0000
commit0f85f23c4357dafc839d1134885ada4c98071d30 (patch)
treee4068c49d75f0e51164391ff5b93152330c870e5 /Master/texmf-dist/doc
parent26313b1db1b3d4f64ae1a9f29aefd4d9a0eb59e3 (diff)
msc (13may22)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@63291 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib76
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.pdfbin61584 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex250
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex1003
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.pdfbin229228 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex2841
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdfbin0 -> 338165 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex2299
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.pdfbin154934 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex1547
13 files changed, 3399 insertions, 4692 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt
index 3d7872812d5..c3b3d06a8b6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/COPYRIGHT.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,7 @@
%% MSC Macro Package
%% msc.sty
-%% June 2, 2008
%%
-%% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
+%% Copyright 2022 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
%
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
@@ -14,18 +13,12 @@
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is T. van Deursen.
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Reynaldo Gil Pons.
%
% This program consists of the files
% msc.sty
% manual.tex
-% manual.pdf
-% refman.tex
-% refman.pdf
+% manual_macros.tex
% biblio.bib
-% maintenance.tex
-% maintenance.pdf
-% README
-% COPYRIGHT
-
-
+% README.txt
+% COPYRIGHT.txt
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README
deleted file mode 100644
index 5388eceb50e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-MSC Macro Package
------------------
-Version 1.16
-June 2, 2008
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-
-This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2005/12/01 or later.
-
-This program consists of the files
- msc.sty
- manual.tex
- manual.pdf
- refman.tex
- refman.pdf
- biblio.bib
- maintenance.tex
- maintenance.pdf
- README
- COPYRIGHT
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The MSC macro package is a LaTeX2e package to draw MSC diagrams. See
-user manual (manual.pdf) and reference manual (refman.pdf) for more
-information.
-
-Contact address:
-Ton van Deursen
-Universit\'e du Luxembourg
-Facult\'e des Sciences, de la Technologie et de la Communication
-6, rue Richard Coudenhove-Kalergi
-L-1359 Luxembourg
-Email: ton.vandeursen@uni.lu
-Updates via: http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1f7ee0326e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/README.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+MSC Macro Package
+-----------------
+Version 2.00
+May 13, 2022
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+The MSC macro package is a LaTeX2e package to draw MSC diagrams. See
+user manual (manual.pdf) for more information.
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+Contact address:
+Reynaldo Gil Pons
+Université du Luxembourg
+Maison du Nombre
+6 Av. de la Fonte
+L-4364 Esch-sur-Alzette
+Email: reynaldo.gilpons@uni.lu
+Website: http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a992bdb59d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/biblio.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+@InProceedings{RudolphGrabowskiGraubmann96,
+ author = {E. Rudolph and P.Graubmann and J. Grabowski},
+ title = {Tutorial on Message Sequence Charts {(MSC'96})},
+ booktitle = {FORTE},
+ year = 1996
+}
+
+@Booklet{z120,
+ title = {{ITU-TS} {R}ecommendation {Z.120}: {M}essage {S}equence {C}hart {(MSC)}},
+ author = {ITU-TS},
+ address = {Geneva},
+ year = 1997
+}
+
+@Book{GSM97,
+ AUTHOR = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach},
+ TITLE = {{T}he {\LaTeX} {G}raphics {C}ompanion},
+ PUBLISHER = "Addison-Wesley",
+ YEAR = 1997
+}
+
+
+@Book{Lam94,
+ author = {L. Lamport},
+ title = {{\LaTeX}---A Document Preparation System---User's Guide and Reference Manual},
+ publisher = {Adsison-Wesley},
+ year = 1994,
+ edition = {2nd},
+ note = {Updated for {\LaTeXe}}
+}
+
+@Manual{BM02,
+ title = {A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence
+ Charts---Reference Manual---Describing {\mscpack}
+ version~{\mscversion}},
+ author = {V. Bos and T. van Deursen and S. Mauw},
+ year = {2010},
+ month = {December},
+ note = {Included in MSC macro package distribution}
+}
+
+@Manual{BM02a,
+ title = {A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence
+ Charts---User Manual---Describing {\mscpack}
+ version~{\mscversion}},
+ author = {V. Bos and T. van Deursen and S. Mauw},
+ year = {2010},
+ month = {January},
+ note = {Included in MSC macro package distribution}
+}
+
+@Manual{BM02b,
+ title = {A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence
+ Charts---Maintenance document---Describing {\mscpack}
+ version~{\mscversion}},
+ author = {V. Bos and T. van Deursen and S. Mauw},
+ year = {2010},
+ month = {January},
+ note = {Included in MSC macro package distribution}
+}
+
+@article{mertz2007graphics,
+ title={Graphics with TikZ},
+ author={Mertz, Andrew and Slough, William},
+ journal={The PracTEX Journal},
+ volume={1},
+ year={2007}
+}
+
+@manual{tantau2022pgf,
+ author = {Till Tantau},
+ title = {The TikZ and PGF Packages},
+ subtitle = {Manual for version 3.1.9a},
+ url = {https://github.com/pgf-tikz/pgf/releases/download/3.1.9a/pgfmanual-3.1.9a.pdf},
+ date = {2022-05-13},
+} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index c050ebe05b0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e49133c6ee..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/maintenance.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,250 +0,0 @@
-% file: maintenance.tex
-% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
-%
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{a4wide}
-\usepackage{msc}
-
-\title{
- A {\LaTeX{}} macro package for Message Sequence Charts---Maintenance
- document
-}
-
-
-\author{
- \begin{tabular}{c}
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- Victor Bos &
- Ton van Deursen &
- Sjouke Mauw \\
- &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg \\[-0.8ex]
- \scriptsize \texttt{victor.bos@ssf.fi} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{ton.vandeursen@uni.lu} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{sjouke.mauw@uni.lu}
- \end{tabular}\\
- \end{tabular}
-}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\date{\small Version \mscversion, last update \today}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
-\noindent
-The MSC macro package facilitates the \LaTeX\ user to easily include
-Message Sequence Charts in his texts. This document contains
-information which supports the maintenance of the package.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-This document contains three lists related to the maintenance of the
-MSC macro package. This is a \LaTeX\ package for drawing Message
-Sequence Charts.
-For additional information consult the following URL:
-\verb+http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/+.
-
-The first list contains an overview of all publicly released versions
-of the MSC macro package. The second list contains all known (yet
-unresolved) bugs of the MSC macro package. The third list is the wish
-list, containing wishes expressed by the users of the package w.r.t.
-desired additional functionality.
-
-\section{Versions}
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Version 1.16, beta release, 2008/06/02
-
-The MSC package used old \verb+PSTricks+-syntax of the \verb+\scalebox+
-command. To prevent mismatches with the \verb+graphicx+ package, this
-macro was renamed to \verb+\psscalebox+.
-
-The \verb+action+ and \verb+condition+ macros are extended with a
-starred version, which automatically adjust the size of the rectangle
-and hexagon based on the size of the contents.
-
-Name and address information has been updated.
-
-\item Version 1.13, beta release, 2002/06/27.
-
-The label positioning of version 1.12 is reimplemented. In fact, the
-implementation of messages is rewritten completely. The same method to
-compute the location of labels is used in \verb+\mess+, \verb+create+,
-\verb+lost+, and \verb+found+. The new implementation is backward
-compatible, meaning that old documents using the MSC Macro Package
-will still look the same.
-
-In addition, the bounding box bug is partly fixed. An \verb+\fbox+ is
-drawn around each msc, hmsc, and mscdoc diagram. This enables dvips to
-compute the right bounding box. Since the \verb+\fbox+ is drawn in
-white, there is no visible result as long as the background is white,
-too. A consequence of this bug fix is that the MSC Macro package
-requires the \textsf{color} package. Just like the other required
-packages, \textsf{pstricks}, \textsf{calc}, and \textsf{ifthen}, this
-is a standard \LaTeXe{} package.
-
-\item Version 1.12, beta release, 2002/06/18.
-
-In this version, the user has more control over the positioning of
-message labels. Implementation not finished yet.
-
-\item Version 1.11, Public release, 2002/06/06.
-
-Minor bug fix.\\ The \verb+\stepcounter+ problem that occurred while
-using the MSC Macro Package together with overlays (slides) is solved.
-
-\item Version 1.10a, Public release, 2002/04/11.
-
-Minor bug fixes.\\
-The email addresses and websites mentioned in the files have been
-corrected (if necessary).
-
-The problem with the german package (german.sty) has been solved. This
-bug was found by Christian Kaeunicke. The german package redefines the
-meaning of the " symbol in order to type german texts more
-efficiently. However, this was not compatible with the msc package
-(before version 1.10a), because it uses the " symbol in
-(error)-messages. The new version (1.10a) uses the ' symbol instead of
-the " symbol. This seems to solve the problem with the german
-package. However, there are probably packages assigning special
-meaning to the ' symbol and which will therefore not work properly
-with the msc package.
-
-\item Version 1.10, Public release, 2002/04/10.
-
-Major improvements: support for two new types of diagrams: High-level
-MSCs and MSC documents. Additional MSC constructs: fat (double line)
-instances, gates, time measurements, comments, instance regions
-(activation, suspension, and co-regions), method replies (dashed
-message arrows). Left and right overlap of inline expressions and MSC
-references in an MSC diagram can be specified separately.
-
-Reference manual. For a list of (all) commands and lengths, see
-reference manual.
-
-Package now also available at CTAN.
-
-\item Version 1.4, Public release, 1999/04/23.
-
-Minor bug fixes.\\
-Additionally supports: Instance creation, MSC references, and inline
-expressions.\\
-Extra parameters:
-\verb+\referenceoverlap+, \verb+\inlineoverlap+, \verb+\stopwidth+.\\
-Adjustment of default values. There are now three sizes
-(large/normal/small) instead of two. The middle size is now default.\\
-New command \verb+\setmscscale+ to scale the complete MSC up/down.
-
-\item Version 1.3, Public release, 1999/04/10.
-
-Minor bug fixes.
-Additionally supports: Conditions, combined timer symbols, instance
-stop.\\
-Extra parameters:
-\verb+\conditionheight+, \verb+\conditionoverlap+, \verb+\stopwidth+.
-Leveloffset can be specified in \verb+nextlevel+ command.
-
-\item Version 1.2, Public release, 1999/03/29.
-
-Minor bug fixes.
-Code restructuring.
-Additionally supports: Actions.\\
-Extra parameters:
-\verb+\actionheight+, \verb+\actionwidth+.
-
-\item Version 1.1, Public release, 1999/03/24.
-
-Minor bug fixes.
-Additionally supports: timers (singular events), lost and found
-messages, generalized ordering. Extra parameters:
-\verb+\lostsymbolradius+, \verb+\timerwidth+. The macro
-\verb+\setfootcolor+ replaces \verb+\setfootgrayness+, and the macro
-\verb+\setmscvalues+ replaces \verb+\resetmsclengths+.
-Some default values have been adjusted.
-
-\item Version 1.0, First public release, 1999/03/16.
-
-Supports drawing of the following MSC constructs: MSC frame,
-instances, messages (including self and env messages), coregions.
-Includes some parameters for fine tuning of the drawing.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Bugs}
-The MSC macro package contains numerous bugs (and hidden features).
-As of now, these are the only ones that have revealed themselves in public.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item Some starred versions of commands of the MSC Macro package do
-not cooperate with the \textsf{amsbsy} package. The problem is that
-the latter package redefined the macro \verb+\@ifstar+. This bug was
-dicovered by Sjouke Mauw.
-
-\item The size of msc diagrams is computed incorrectly. After
-generating an eps file (dvips -E) from a dvi file containing exactly
-one msc diagram, the diagram is clipped incorrectly. This bug was
-dicovered by Tim Willemse.
-
-\item There are \LaTeX{} packages that assign special meaning to some
-characters. Consequently, the  MSC Macro package might not function properly
-with such packages. Since we cannot anticipate on these semantical
-changes of symbols, we don't know of a good solution to it. However,
-we try to find solutions for these problems if they originated from
-packages that are in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution.
-
-A concrete example was the \textsf{german} package, as pointed out by
-Christian Kaeunicke. This package assigns special meaning to the "
-symbol. If you issue \verb+\usepackage{german}+ \emph{before}
-\verb+\usepackage{msc}+, you will get an error as soon as your first
-msc diagram is compiled. As Christian also mentioned, the error does
-not occur if the import order of the packages is reversed.
-
-As of MSC Macro package version 1.10a, this concrete bug with the
-\textsf{german} package has been solved and the order between
-\textsf{msc} and \textsf{german} is not restricted anymore.
-
-\item The MSC Macro Package (version $\leq 1.10a$) crashes with the
-overlay environment of the slides document class. The bug is due to a
-redefinition of the \verb+\refstepcounter+ macro by the slides
-documentclass. This bug was discovered by Volker Stolz. He and Markus
-Mohnen proposed a solution: increase the counters used by the MSC
-macro package manually. In Version~1.11 this solution is
-implemented. Thanks Volker and Markus!
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Wishes}
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item Split MSCs over multiple pages (T. van Deursen, 2008/02/18)
-
-\item Make the parameters of the MSC Macro package more
-consistent. For example, the \verb+\mess+ macro and the
-\verb+\measure+ have similar positioning parameters, but they cannot
-have the same values. (V. Bos 2002/06/16)
-
-\item Add a section to the user manual describing how to generate
-other formats (like html, PostScript, pdf). (S. Mauw 2002/06/14)
-
-\item Add to the user manual a figure describing the various HMSC lengths.
- (S. Mauw 2002/06/14)
-
-\item Add automatic resizing of action symbols, as described in one of
-the tricks in the reference manual. (S. Mauw 2002/06/14)
-
-\item Add UML extensions to the MSC Macro package. Describe clearly
-which UML diagrams we support.(S. Mauw, 2002/06/13)
-
-\item A possibility to change the color of instance regions. V. Bos
-(2002/04/09).
-
-\item Add option to messages to determine relative position of
-label. (S. Mauw 1999/04/15).
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b3caf71c78b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual-macros.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1003 @@
+% \newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\bslash #1}}
+
+\newcommand{\acro}[1]{{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\MSC}{\acro{MSC}}
+\newcommand{\HMSC}{\acro{HMSC}}
+\newcommand{\MSCdoc}{\MSC{}doc}
+\newcommand{\mscpack}{\MSC{} macro package}
+% \newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\cmdarg}[1]{\{\emph{#1}\}}
+\newcommand{\coordarg}[1]{\emph{#1}}
+\newcommand{\coordargs}[2]{(\coordarg{#1},\coordarg{#2})}
+\newcommand{\lnsvalue}[3]{large/normal/small value #1/#2/#3}
+
+\newenvironment{defs}{%
+ \begin{list}{}%
+ {\setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{1em}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1em}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{1ex}%
+ \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}%
+ \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{##1}%
+ \raggedright%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \end{list}}
+\newcommand{\tikzname}{Ti\emph{k}Z}
+\newcommand{\beamer}{\textsc{beamer}}
+\newcommand{\pdf}{\textsc{pdf}}
+\newcommand{\eps}{\texttt{eps}}
+\newcommand{\pgfname}{\textsc{pgf}}
+% \newcommand{\prosper}{\textsc{prosper}}
+% \newcommand{\seminar}{\textsc{seminar}}
+% \newcommand{\texpower}{\textsc{texpower}}
+% \newcommand{\foils}{\textsc{foils}}
+
+% \providecommand\href[2]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hypertarget[2]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand\hyperlink[2]{\texttt{#1}}
+
+
+\colorlet{examplefill}{yellow!80!black}
+\definecolor{graphicbackground}{rgb}{1,1,1}
+\definecolor{codebackground}{rgb}{0.90,0.90,1}
+
+\newenvironment{pgfmanualentry}{\par\vspace*{-8pt}\list{}{\leftmargin=2em\itemindent-\leftmargin\def\makelabel##1{\hss##1}}}{\endlist\par\vspace*{-8pt}}
+\newcommand\pgfmanualentryheadline[1]{\itemsep=0pt\parskip=0pt\item\strut{#1}\par\topsep=0pt}
+\newcommand\pgfmanualbody{\parskip3pt\vspace*{-3pt}}
+
+
+
+\newenvironment{pgflayout}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\texttt{\string\pgfpagesuselayout\char`\{\declare{#1}\char`\}}\oarg{options}}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} layout}%
+ \index{Page layouts!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{command}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractcommand#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{commandlist}[1]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \foreach \xx in {#1} {%
+ \expandafter\extractcommand\xx\@@
+ }%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}{%
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}%
+
+% \begin{internallist}[register]{\pgf@xa}
+% \end{internallist}
+%
+% \begin{internallist}[register]{\pgf@xa,\pgf@xb}
+% \end{internallist}
+\newenvironment{internallist}[2][register]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \foreach \xx in {#2} {%
+ \expandafter\extractinternalcommand\expandafter{\xx}{#1}%
+ }%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}{%
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}%
+\def\extractinternalcommand#1#2{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Internal #2 \declare{\texttt{\string#1}}}%
+ \removeats{#1}%
+ \index{Internals!\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}%
+ \index{\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{\textbackslash\strippedat}{}%
+}
+
+%% MW: START MATH MACROS
+\def\mvar#1{{\ifmmode\textrm{\textit{#1}}\else\rmfamily\textit{#1}\fi}}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\def\extractmathfunctionname#1{\extractmathfunctionname@#1(,)\tmpa\tmpb}
+\def\extractmathfunctionname@#1(#2)#3\tmpb{\def\mathname{#1}}
+
+\makeatother
+
+\newenvironment{math-function}[1]{
+ \def\mathdefaultname{#1}
+ \extractmathfunctionname{#1}
+ \edef\mathurl{{math:\mathname}}\expandafter\hypertarget\expandafter{\mathurl}{}%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \index{\mathname @\protect\texttt{\mathname} math function}%
+ \index{Math functions!\mathname @\protect\texttt{\mathname}}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\pgfmanualemptytext{}
+\def\pgfmanualvbarvbar{\char`\|\char`\|}
+
+\newenvironment{math-operator}[4][]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \csname math#3operator\endcsname{#2}{#4}
+ \def\mathtest{#4}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \def\mathtype{(#3 operator)}
+ \else%
+ \def\mathtype{(#3 operator; uses the \texttt{#4} function)}
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\mathexample\hfill\mathtype}%
+ \def\mathtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \index{#2@\protect\texttt{#2} #3 math operator}%
+ \index{Math operators!#2@\protect\texttt{#2}}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{\end{pgfmanualentry}}
+
+\newenvironment{math-operators}[5][]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \csname math#4operator\endcsname{#2}{#3}
+ \def\mathtest{#5}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \def\mathtype{(#4 operators)}
+ \else%
+ \def\mathtype{(#4 operators; use the \texttt{#5} function)}
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\mathexample\hfill\mathtype}%
+ \def\mathtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\mathtest\pgfmanualemptytext%
+ \index{#2#3@\protect\texttt{#2\protect\ #3} #4 math operators}%
+ \index{Math operators!#2#3@\protect\texttt{#2\protect\ #3}}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{\end{pgfmanualentry}}
+
+\def\mathinfixoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \def\mathexample{\mvar{x}\space\texttt{#1}\space\mvar{y}}%
+}
+
+\def\mathprefixoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \def\mathexample{\texttt{#1}\mvar{x}}%
+}
+
+\def\mathpostfixoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1}}
+ \def\mathexample{\mvar{x}\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+\def\mathgroupoperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{\texttt{#1\ #2}}%
+ \def\mathexample{\texttt{#1}\mvar{x}\texttt{#2}}%
+}
+
+\expandafter\let\csname matharray accessoperator\endcsname=\mathgroupoperator
+\expandafter\let\csname matharrayoperator\endcsname=\mathgroupoperator
+
+\def\mathconditionaloperator#1#2{%
+ \def\mathoperator{#1\space#2}
+ \def\mathexample{\mvar{x}\ \texttt{#1}\ \mvar{y}\ {\texttt{#2}}\ \mvar{z}}
+}
+
+\newcommand\mathcommand[1][\mathdefaultname]{%
+ \expandafter\makemathcommand#1(\empty)\stop%
+ \expandafter\extractcommand\mathcommandname\@@%
+ \medskip
+}
+\makeatletter
+
+\def\makemathcommand#1(#2)#3\stop{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\mathcommandname\expandafter{\csname pgfmath#1\endcsname}%
+ \ifx#2\empty%
+ \else%
+ \@makemathcommand#2,\stop,
+ \fi}
+\def\@makemathcommand#1,{%
+ \ifx#1\stop%
+ \else%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\mathcommandname\expandafter{\mathcommandname{\ttfamily\char`\{#1\char`\}}}%
+ \expandafter\@makemathcommand%
+ \fi}
+\makeatother
+
+\def\calcname{\textsc{calc}}
+%% MW: END MATH MACROS
+
+
+\def\extractcommand#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\declare{\texttt{\string#1}}#2}%
+ \removeats{#1}%
+ \index{\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{\textbackslash\strippedat}{}%
+}
+
+
+% \begin{environment}{{name}\marg{arguments}}
+\newenvironment{environment}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractenvironement#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\extractenvironement#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\char`\\begin\char`\{\declare{#1}\char`\}}#2}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\ \ }\meta{environment contents}}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\char`\\end\char`\{\declare{#1}\char`\}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} environment}%
+ \index{Environments!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{plainenvironment}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractplainenvironement#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\extractplainenvironement#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\#1}}#2}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\ \ }\meta{environment contents}}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\end#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} environment}%
+ \index{Environments!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{contextenvironment}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractcontextenvironement#1\@@
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\extractcontextenvironement#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\start#1}}#2}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\ \ }\meta{environment contents}}%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{\char`\\stop#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} environment}%
+ \index{Environments!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+
+
+\newenvironment{shape}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Shape {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} shape}%
+ \index{Shapes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{shading}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Shading {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} shading}%
+ \index{Shadings!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{dataformat}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Format {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} format}%
+ \index{Formats!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{handler}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extracthandler#1\@nil%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\gobble#1{}
+\def\extracthandler#1#2\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Key handler \meta{key}{\ttfamily/\declare{#1}}#2}%
+ \index{\gobble#1@\protect\texttt{#1} handler}%
+ \index{Key handlers!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{/handlers/#1}%
+}
+
+
+\makeatletter
+
+
+\newenvironment{stylekey}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\extrakeytext{style, }
+ \extractkey#1\@nil%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\def\choicesep{$\vert$}%
+\def\choicearg#1{\texttt{#1}}
+
+\newif\iffirstchoice
+
+% \mchoice{choice1,choice2,choice3}
+\newcommand\mchoice[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \firstchoicetrue
+ \foreach \mchoice@ in {#1} {%
+ \iffirstchoice
+ \global\firstchoicefalse
+ \else
+ \choicesep
+ \fi
+ \choicearg{\mchoice@}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+
+% \begin{key}{/path/x=value}
+% \begin{key}{/path/x=value (initially XXX)}
+% \begin{key}{/path/x=value (default XXX)}
+\newenvironment{key}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\extrakeytext{}
+ %\def\altpath{\emph{\color{gray}or}}%
+ \extractkey#1\@nil%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+% \insertpathifneeded{a key}{/pgf} -> assign mykey={/pgf/a key}
+% \insertpathifneeded{/tikz/a key}{/pgf} -> assign mykey={/tikz/a key}
+%
+% #1: the key
+% #2: a default path (or empty)
+\def\insertpathifneeded#1#2{%
+ \def\insertpathifneeded@@{#2}%
+ \ifx\insertpathifneeded@@\empty
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \else
+ \insertpathifneeded@#2\@nil
+ \ifpgfutil@in@
+ \def\mykey{#2/#1}%
+ \else
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}%
+\def\insertpathifneeded@#1#2\@nil{%
+ \def\insertpathifneeded@@{#1}%
+ \def\insertpathifneeded@@@{/}%
+ \ifx\insertpathifneeded@@\insertpathifneeded@@@
+ \pgfutil@in@true
+ \else
+ \pgfutil@in@false
+ \fi
+}%
+
+% \begin{keylist}[default path]
+% {/path/option 1=value,/path/option 2=value2}
+% \end{keylist}
+\newenvironment{keylist}[2][]{%
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\extrakeytext{}%
+ \foreach \xx in {#2} {%
+ \expandafter\insertpathifneeded\expandafter{\xx}{#1}%
+ \expandafter\extractkey\mykey\@nil%
+ }%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}{%
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}%
+
+\def\extractkey#1\@nil{%
+ \pgfutil@in@={#1}%
+ \ifpgfutil@in@%
+ \extractkeyequal#1\@nil
+ \else%
+ \pgfutil@in@{(initial}{#1}%
+ \ifpgfutil@in@%
+ \extractequalinitial#1\@nil%
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}}\hfill(\extrakeytext no value)}%
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \def\myname{}%
+ \firsttimetrue%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+ \fi
+ \fi%
+}
+
+\def\extractkeyequal#1=#2\@nil{%
+ \pgfutil@in@{(default}{#2}%
+ \ifpgfutil@in@%
+ \extractdefault{#1}#2\@nil%
+ \else%
+ \pgfutil@in@{(initial}{#2}%
+ \ifpgfutil@in@%
+ \extractinitial{#1}#2\@nil%
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}=}#2\hfill(\extrakeytext no default)}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi%
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \def\myname{}%
+ \firsttimetrue%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+}
+
+\def\extractdefault#1#2(default #3)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}\opt{=}}\opt{#2}\hfill (\extrakeytext default {\ttfamily#3})}%
+}
+
+\def\extractinitial#1#2(initially #3)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}=}#2\hfill (\extrakeytext no default, initially {\ttfamily#3})}%
+}
+
+\def\extractequalinitial#1 (initially #2)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\declare{#1}}\hfill (\extrakeytext initially {\ttfamily#2})}%
+ \def\mykey{#1}%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \def\myname{}%
+ \firsttimetrue%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+}
+
+% Introduces a key alias '/#1/<name of current key>'
+% to be used inside of \begin{key} ... \end{key}
+\def\keyalias#1{\vspace{-3pt}\item{\small alias {\ttfamily/#1/\myname}}\vspace{-2pt}\par
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{/#1/\myname}{}%
+}
+
+\newif\iffirsttime
+
+\makeatother
+
+\def\decompose/#1/#2\nil{%
+ \def\test{#2}%
+ \ifx\test\empty%
+ % aha.
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} key}%
+ \index{\mypath#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \def\myname{#1}%
+ \else%
+ \iffirsttime
+ \begingroup
+ % also make a pdf link anchor with full key path.
+ \def\hyperlabelwithoutslash##1/\nil{%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{##1}{}%
+ }%
+ \hyperlabelwithoutslash/#1/#2\nil
+ \endgroup
+ \def\mypath{#1@\protect\texttt{/#1/}!}%
+ \firsttimefalse
+ \else
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\mypath\expandafter{\mypath#1@\protect\texttt{#1/}!}%
+ \fi
+ \def\firsttime{}
+ \decompose/#2\nil%
+ \fi%
+}
+
+\def\indexkey#1{%
+ \def\mypath{}%
+ \decompose#1/\nil%
+}
+
+\newenvironment{predefinedmethod}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractpredefinedmethod#1\@nil
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\def\extractpredefinedmethod#1(#2)\@nil{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Method \declare{\ttfamily #1}\texttt(#2\texttt) \hfill(predefined for all classes)}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} method}%
+ \index{Methods!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{ooclass}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \def\currentclass{#1}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Class \declare{\texttt{#1}}}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} class}%
+ \index{Class #1@Class \protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \index{Classes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{method}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractmethod#1\@nil
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\def\extractmethod#1(#2)\@nil{%
+ \def\test{#1}
+ \ifx\test\currentclass
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Constructor \declare{\ttfamily #1}\texttt(#2\texttt)}
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Method \declare{\ttfamily #1}\texttt(#2\texttt)}
+ \fi
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} method}%
+ \index{Methods!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \index{Class \currentclass!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+\newenvironment{attribute}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \extractattribute#1\@nil
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\def\extractattribute#1=#2;\@nil{%
+ \def\test{#2}%
+ \ifx\test\@empty
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Private attribute \declare{\ttfamily #1} \hfill (initially empty)}
+ \else
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Private attribute \declare{\ttfamily #1} \hfill (initially {\ttfamily #2})}
+ \fi
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} attribute}%
+ \index{Attributes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \index{Class \currentclass!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+}
+
+
+
+\newenvironment{predefinednode}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Predefined node {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} node}%
+ \index{Predefined node!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{coordinatesystem}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Coordinate system {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} coordinate system}%
+ \index{Coordinate systems!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#1}{}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{snake}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Snake {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} snake}%
+ \index{Snakes!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+\newenvironment{decoration}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{Decoration {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} decoration}%
+ \index{Decorations!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\def\pgfmanualbar{\char`\|}
+\makeatletter
+\newenvironment{pathoperation}[3][]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\textcolor{gray}{{\ttfamily\char`\\path}\
+ \ \dots}
+ \declare{\texttt{#2}}#3\ \textcolor{gray}{\dots\texttt{;}}}%
+ \def\pgfmanualtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\pgfmanualtest\@empty%
+ \index{#2@\protect\texttt{#2} path operation}%
+ \index{Path operations!#2@\protect\texttt{#2}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#2}{}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\newenvironment{datavisualizationoperation}[3][]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\textcolor{gray}{{\ttfamily\char`\\datavisualization}\
+ \ \dots}
+ \declare{\texttt{#2}}#3\ \textcolor{gray}{\dots\texttt{;}}}%
+ \def\pgfmanualtest{#1}%
+ \ifx\pgfmanualtest\@empty%
+ \index{#2@\protect\texttt{#2} (data visualization)}%
+ \index{Data visualization!#2@\protect\texttt{#2}}%
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{#2}{}%
+ \fi%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\def\extractcommand#1#2\@@{%
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{\declare{\texttt{\string#1}}#2}%
+ \removeats{#1}%
+ \index{\strippedat @\protect\myprintocmmand{\strippedat}}
+ \pgfmanualpdflabel{\textbackslash\strippedat}{}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{filedescription}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{File {\ttfamily\declare{#1}}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} file}%
+ \index{Packages and files!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{packageoption}[1]{
+ \begin{pgfmanualentry}
+ \pgfmanualentryheadline{{\ttfamily\char`\\usepackage[\declare{#1}]\char`\{pgf\char`\}}}
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} package option}%
+ \index{Package options for \textsc{pgf}!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+ \pgfmanualbody
+}
+{
+ \end{pgfmanualentry}
+}
+
+
+
+\newcommand\opt[1]{{\color{black!50!green}#1}}
+\newcommand\ooarg[1]{{\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}}
+
+\def\pfgopt{\afterassignment\pgfmanualopt\let\next=}
+
+
+{
+ \makeatletter
+ \global\let\myempty=\@empty
+ \global\let\mygobble=\@gobble
+ \catcode`\@=12
+ \gdef\getridofats#1@#2\relax{%
+ \def\getridtest{#2}%
+ \ifx\getridtest\myempty%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\strippedat\expandafter{\strippedat#1}
+ \else%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\strippedat\expandafter{\strippedat#1\protect\printanat}
+ \getridofats#2\relax%
+ \fi%
+ }
+
+ \gdef\removeats#1{%
+ \let\strippedat\myempty%
+ \edef\strippedtext{\stripcommand#1}%
+ \expandafter\getridofats\strippedtext @\relax%
+ }
+
+ \gdef\stripcommand#1{\expandafter\mygobble\string#1}
+}
+
+\def\printanat{\char`\@}
+
+\def\declare{\afterassignment\pgfmanualdeclare\let\next=}
+\def\pgfmanualdeclare{\ifx\next\bgroup\bgroup\color{red!75!black}\else{\color{red!75!black}\next}\fi}
+
+
+\let\textoken=\command
+\let\endtextoken=\endcommand
+
+\def\myprintocmmand#1{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+
+\def\example{\par\smallskip\noindent\textit{Example: }}
+\def\themeauthor{\par\smallskip\noindent\textit{Theme author: }}
+
+
+\def\indexoption#1{%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} option}%
+ \index{Graphic options and styles!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+\def\itemcalendaroption#1{\item \declare{\texttt{#1}}%
+ \index{#1@\protect\texttt{#1} date test}%
+ \index{Date tests!#1@\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\ifx\scantokens\@undefined
+ \PackageError{pgfmanual-macros}{You need to use extended latex
+ (elatex) or (pdfelatex) to process this document}{}
+\fi
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`|=0
+\catcode`[= 1
+\catcode`]=2
+\catcode`\{=12
+\catcode `\}=12
+\catcode`\\=12 |gdef|find@example#1\end{codeexample}[|endofcodeexample[#1]]
+|endgroup
+
+% define \returntospace.
+%
+% It should define NEWLINE as {}, spaces and tabs as \space.
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\^=7
+\catcode`\^^M=13
+\catcode`\^^I=13
+\catcode`\ =13%
+\gdef\returntospace{\catcode`\ =13\def {\space}\catcode`\^^I=13\def^^I{\space}}
+\gdef\showreturn{\show^^M}
+\endgroup
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\%=13
+\catcode`\^^M=13
+\gdef\commenthandler{\catcode`\%=13\def%{\@gobble@till@return}}
+\gdef\@gobble@till@return#1^^M{}
+\gdef\@gobble@till@return@ignore#1^^M{\ignorespaces}
+\gdef\typesetcomment{\catcode`\%=13\def%{\@typeset@till@return}}
+\gdef\@typeset@till@return#1^^M{{\def%{\char`\%}\textsl{\char`\%#1}}\par}
+\endgroup
+
+% Define tab-implementation functions
+% \codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars@
+% and
+% \codeexample@tabinit@catcode@
+%
+% They should ONLY be used in case that tab replacement is active.
+%
+% This here is merely a preparation step.
+%
+% Idea:
+% \codeexample@tabinit@catcode@ will make TAB active
+% and
+% \codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars@ will insert as many spaces as
+% /codeexample/tabsize contains.
+{
+\catcode`\^^I=13
+% ATTENTION: do NOT use tabs in these definitions!!
+\gdef\codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \count0=\pgfkeysvalueof{/codeexample/tabsize}\relax
+ \toks0={}%
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\count0>0
+ \advance\count0 by-1
+ \toks0=\expandafter{\the\toks0\ }%
+ \repeat
+ \xdef\codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars@@{\the\toks0}%
+ \endgroup
+ \let^^I=\codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars@@
+}%
+\gdef\codeexample@tabinit@catcode@{\catcode`\^^I=13}%
+}%
+
+% Called after any options have been set. It assigns
+% \codeexample@tabinit@catcode
+% and
+% \codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars
+% which are used inside of
+%\begin{codeexample}
+% ...
+%\end{codeexample}
+%
+% \codeexample@tabinit@catcode is either \relax or it makes tab
+% active.
+%
+% \codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars is either \relax or it inserts
+% a proper replacement sequence for tabs (as many spaces as
+% configured)
+\def\codeexample@tabinit{%
+ \ifnum\pgfkeysvalueof{/codeexample/tabsize}=0\relax
+ \let\codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars=\relax
+ \let\codeexample@tabinit@catcode=\relax
+ \else
+ \let\codeexample@tabinit@catcode=\codeexample@tabinit@catcode@
+ \let\codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars=\codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars@
+ \fi
+}
+
+\pgfqkeys{/codeexample}{%
+ width/.code= {\setlength\codeexamplewidth{#1}},
+ graphic/.code= {\colorlet{graphicbackground}{#1}},
+ code/.code= {\colorlet{codebackground}{#1}},
+ execute code/.is if=code@execute,
+ code only/.code= {\code@executefalse},
+ pre/.store in=\code@pre,
+ post/.store in=\code@post,
+ % #1 is the *complete* environment contents as it shall be
+ % typeset. In particular, the catcodes are NOT the normal ones.
+ typeset listing/.code= {#1},
+ render instead/.store in=\code@render,
+ vbox/.code= {\def\code@pre{\vbox\bgroup\setlength{\hsize}{\linewidth-6pt}}\def\code@post{\egroup}},
+ ignorespaces/.code= {\let\@gobble@till@return=\@gobble@till@return@ignore},
+ leave comments/.code= {\def\code@catcode@hook{\catcode`\%=12}\let\commenthandler=\relax\let\typesetcomment=\relax},
+ tabsize/.initial=0,% FIXME : this here is merely used for indentation. It is just a TAB REPLACEMENT.
+ every codeexample/.style={width=4cm+7pt},
+}
+
+\let\code@pre\pgfutil@empty
+\let\code@post\pgfutil@empty
+\let\code@render\pgfutil@empty
+\def\code@catcode@hook{}
+
+\newdimen\codeexamplewidth
+\newif\ifcode@execute
+\newbox\codeexamplebox
+\def\codeexample[#1]{%
+ \begingroup%
+ \code@executetrue
+ \pgfqkeys{/codeexample}{every codeexample,#1}%
+ \codeexample@tabinit% assigns \codeexample@tabinit@[catcode,replacementchars]
+ \parindent0pt
+ \begingroup%
+ \par%
+ \medskip%
+ \let\do\@makeother%
+ \dospecials%
+ \obeylines%
+ \@vobeyspaces%
+ \catcode`\%=13%
+ \catcode`\^^M=13%
+ \code@catcode@hook%
+ \codeexample@tabinit@catcode
+ \relax%
+ \find@example}
+\def\endofcodeexample#1{%
+ \endgroup%
+ \ifcode@execute%
+ \setbox\codeexamplebox=\hbox{%
+ \ifx\code@render\pgfutil@empty%
+ {%
+ {%
+ \returntospace%
+ \commenthandler%
+ \xdef\code@temp{#1}% removes returns and comments
+ }%
+ \catcode`\^^M=9%
+ \colorbox{graphicbackground}{\color{black}\ignorespaces%
+ \code@pre\expandafter\scantokens\expandafter{\code@temp\ignorespaces}\code@post\ignorespaces}%
+ }%
+ \else%
+ \colorbox{graphicbackground}{\color{black}\ignorespaces%
+ \code@render}%
+ \fi%
+ }%
+ \ifdim\wd\codeexamplebox>\codeexamplewidth%
+ \def\code@start{\par}%
+ \def\code@flushstart{}\def\code@flushend{}%
+ \def\code@mid{\parskip2pt\par\noindent}%
+ \def\code@width{\linewidth-6pt}%
+ \def\code@end{}%
+ \else%
+ \def\code@start{%
+ \linewidth=\textwidth%
+ \parshape \@ne 0pt \linewidth
+ \leavevmode%
+ \hbox\bgroup}%
+ \def\code@flushstart{\hfill}%
+ \def\code@flushend{\hbox{}}%
+ \def\code@mid{\hskip6pt}%
+ \def\code@width{\linewidth-12pt-\codeexamplewidth}%
+ \def\code@end{\egroup}%
+ \fi%
+ \code@start%
+ \noindent%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{\codeexamplewidth}\raggedright
+ \hrule width0pt%
+ \footnotesize\vskip-1em%
+ \code@flushstart\box\codeexamplebox\code@flushend%
+ \vskip-1ex
+ \leavevmode%
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \else%
+ \def\code@mid{\par}
+ \def\code@width{\linewidth-6pt}
+ \def\code@end{}
+ \fi%
+ \code@mid%
+ \colorbox{codebackground}{%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{\code@width}%
+ {%
+ \let\do\@makeother
+ \dospecials
+ \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
+ \normalfont\ttfamily\footnotesize
+ \typesetcomment%
+ \codeexample@tabinit@replacementchars
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \def\par{%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \leavevmode \null \@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
+ \fi}%
+ \obeylines
+ \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/codeexample/typeset listing/.@cmd}{#1}\pgfeov
+ }
+ \end{minipage}}%
+ \code@end%
+ \par%
+ \medskip
+ \end{codeexample}
+}
+
+\def\endcodeexample{\endgroup}
+
+
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% TeX-master: "beameruserguide"
+%%% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 9cc6c420cf4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index d6025770fe4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/manual.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2841 +0,0 @@
-% file: manual.tex
-% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
-%
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
-\usepackage{a4wide}
-\usepackage{url}
-\usepackage{moreverb}
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{msc}
-
-% we allow a ragged right
-\setlength{\rightskip}{0pt plus 0.05\linewidth minus 0pt}
-
-
-
-
-
-\newlength{\rpwidth}
-\setlength{\rpwidth}{.5cm}
-\newlength{\rpheight}
-\setlength{\rpheight}{0.5\levelheight}
-\newcommand{\rpN}{%
- \psframe(-0.5\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](0\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{n}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{ne}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{e}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{se}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpS}{%
- \psframe(-.5\rpwidth,\rpheight)(.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[t](0\rpwidth,0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{s}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{sw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{w}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\tiny \textsc{nw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-
-
-
-
-
-% The following code is taken from the doc package. It defines a global
-% macro \bslash that produces a bslash (if present in the current font).
-\makeatletter
-{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12 |gdef|bslash{\}}
-\makeatother
-\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\bslash #1}}
-
-\newcommand{\acro}[1]{{#1}}
-
-\newcommand{\MSC}{\acro{MSC}}
-\newcommand{\HMSC}{\acro{HMSC}}
-\newcommand{\MSCdoc}{\MSC{}doc}
-\newcommand{\mscpack}{\MSC{} macro package}
-
-\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\opt}[1]{[#1]}
-\newcommand{\cmdarg}[1]{\{\emph{#1}\}}
-\newcommand{\coordarg}[1]{\emph{#1}}
-\newcommand{\coordargs}[2]{(\coordarg{#1},\coordarg{#2})}
-\newcommand{\lnsvalue}[3]{large/normal/small value #1/#2/#3}
-
-\newenvironment{defs}{%
- \begin{list}{}%
- {\setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{1em}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{1em}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{1ex}%
- \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}%
- \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{##1}%
- \raggedright%
- }%
- }{%
- \end{list}}
-
-
-
-\title{
- A \LaTeX\ macro package for Message Sequence Charts\\{\large User Manual}
-}
-
-\author{
- \begin{tabular}{c}
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- Victor Bos &
- Ton van Deursen &
- Sjouke Mauw \\
- &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg \\[-0.8ex]
- \scriptsize \texttt{victor.bos@ssf.fi} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{ton.vandeursen@uni.lu} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{sjouke.mauw@uni.lu}
- \end{tabular}\\
- \end{tabular}
-}
-
-\date{\small Version \mscversion, last update \today\\
- Describing \mscpack{} version \mscversion}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
-\noindent
-The \mscpack{} facilitates the \LaTeX\ user to easily include
-Message Sequence Charts in his texts. This document describes the
-design and use of the \mscpack.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\tableofcontents
-\section{New}
-\label{new}
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.16} solves a bug that was due to a change in
-syntax of the \verb+scalebox+ macro in the \verb+PSTricks+ package.
-
-The \verb+action+ and \verb+condition+ macros are extended with a
-starred option. The starred version of the macros automatically
-adjusts the size of the rectangle and hexagon based on the size of the
-contents.
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.13} has a reimplementation of message commands in MSC
-diagrams. The affected commands are: \verb+\create+, \verb+\found+,
-\verb+\lost+, \verb+\mess+, and \verb+\order+. The new implementation
-provides more control over the placement of message labels.
-
-The command \verb+\selfmesslabelpos+ has been removed.
-
-The bounding box bug has been partly solved. Now, a white \verb+\fbox+
-is drawn around every (msc, mscdoc, hmsc) diagram. This makes it
-possible for \texttt{dvips -E} to compute the correct bounding box for
-the diagrams. Due to the \verb+\fbox+, each diagram is extended with
-0.3pt on each side (left, top, right, and bottom). This bugfix fails
-if the background is not white. The xdvi program shows the white
-\verb+\fbox+ in black with the result that diagrams have two visible
-frames. This seems to be a bug of xdvi.
-
-The lines around comments (\verb+\msccomment+, Section~\ref{comments})
-are changed from gray into black. The reason for this is that the gray
-lines became invisible after converting the document to HTML.
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.12} is a non-public version. It features a preliminary
-implementation of message label position control.
-
-\paragraph{Version~1.11} is a mainly a bugfix of version~1.10a, see~\cite{BM02b}.
-The next list shows the new features of version~1.10a compared to
-version 1.4.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Support for method replies (dashed message arrows):\cmd{mess*} (Section~\ref{messages})
-\item Fat instances, i.e., double line instances (Section~\ref{instances})
-\item Comments (Section~\ref{comments})
-\item Coregions are now special cases of regions (which includes also
-activation and suspension regions). The \cmd{coregionstart} and
-\cmd{coregionend} commands are obsolete and the \cmd{coregionbarwidth}
-is replaced by \cmd{regionbarwidth}.
-\item Gates (Section~\ref{gates})
-\item High-level \MSC{}'s (Section~\ref{hmsc})
-\item \cmd{inlinestart} has additional optional argument to allow for different left and right overlap (Section~\ref{inlines})
-\item \MSCdoc{}s (Section~\ref{mscdoc})
-\item Reference manual~\cite{BM02}
-\item \cmd{referencestart} has additional optional argument to allow for different left and right overlap (Section~\ref{references})
-\item Regions: generalization of coregions supporting activations, suspension, and coregions (Section~\ref{regions})
-\item Time measurements (Section~\ref{measurements})
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Introduction}
-\label{introduction}
-
-The \MSC{} language is a visual language for the description of the
-interaction between different components of a system.
-This language is standardized by the ITU (International
-Telecommunication Union) in Recommendation Z.120~\cite{z120}. An
-introductory text on \MSC{} can be found
-in~\cite{RudolphGrabowskiGraubmann96}. \MSC{}s have a
-wide application domain, ranging from requirements specification to
-testing and documentation.
-An example of a Message Sequence Chart is in Figure~\ref{quick}.
-
-In order to support easy drawing of \MSC{}s in \LaTeX\ documents, we have
-developed the \mscpack. The current version of the \mscpack{}
-supports the following \MSC{} constructs: \MSC{} frame, instances (both
-single line width and double line width), messages (including
-self-messages and messages to the environment), actions, singular and
-combined timer events (set, timeout, reset, set-timeout, set-stop),
-lost and found messages, generalized order, conditions, coregions,
-activation regions, suspension regions, gates, instance creation,
-instance stop, time measurements, references, and inline
-expressions. In addition, there is support for \HMSC{}'s (high-level
-\MSC{}s) and \MSCdoc{}s.
-
-In this manual we explain the design and the use of the \mscpack. For
-a complete overview of all features, we refer to the reference
-manual~\cite{BM02}, which is included in the distribution under the
-name \verb+refman.ps+. Another way to learn how to use the \mscpack{}
-is to have a look at the \LaTeX{} source code of the manual and the
-source code of the reference manual. They are included in the
-distribution under the names \verb+manual.tex+ and \verb+refman.tex+,
-respectively. The \MSC{} constructs are simply introduced as
-syntactic constructs. This paper is not meant to describe their use or
-meaning.
-
-We list the backgrounds of the package and some design decisions in
-Section~\ref{background}.
-Section~\ref{install} contains notes on installing the
-package. Section~\ref{quickstart} contains an example of using the
-package. It allows the impatient reader to quickly start using the
-package. The details of using the package are explained in
-Section~\ref{use}. In Section~\ref{parameters} the parameters are
-explained which determine detailed layout of the various symbols.
-A large but meaningless example is given in
-Section~\ref{example}.
-
-
-\section{Background and motivation}
-\label{background}
-Several commercial and non-commercial tools are available, which
-support drawing or generating Message Sequence Charts. However, these
-tools are in general not freely available and often not flexible
-enough to satisfy all user's wishes with respect to the layout and
-graphical appearance of an \MSC{}.
-Therefore, people often use general drawing tools, such as {\em xfig}
-to draw \MSC{}s. However flexible this approach is, it takes quite some
-effort to produce nice \MSC{} drawings in a tool which is not dedicated
-to \MSC{}s. Furthermore, when drawing a number of \MSC{}s it requires some
-preciseness in order to obtain a consistent set of \MSC{}s.
-
-For these reasons, we have started the design of a set of
-\LaTeX\ macros which support the drawing of \MSC{}s. In this way, an \MSC{} can be
-represented in \LaTeX\ in a textual format and compiled into
-e.g.\ PostScript.
-
-We aimed at satisfying the following requirements and design
-decisions.
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
-The package should follow the ITU standard with respect to shape and
-placement of the symbols. (The current version supports
-the \MSC2000 standard.)
-\item
-Static and dynamic semantics are not considered. The user is allowed
-to violate all semantical restrictions and draw inconsistent \MSC{}s.
-The package only supports elementary syntactical requirements.
-\item
-The package should offer functionality at the right level of
-abstraction. Rather than supplying coordinates of pixels, the
-user should be able to express the placement of symbols in terms of
-{\em levels}.
-Nevertheless, the textual representation of \MSC{}s as defined by the ITU
-standard has a level of abstraction which is too high for our purposes.
-It lacks information about the actual positioning of the \MSC{} symbols,
-while we think that in our package this should be under user control.
-\item
-There should be only minimal automatic restructuring and layout of the
-\MSC{} (e.g.\ the relative positioning of two messages should be as
-defined by the user, even if the messages are not causally ordered).
-\item
-The user can customize the appearance of the \MSC{}s by manipulating
-an appropriate set of parameters.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Installation, copyright and system requirements}
-\label{install}
-
-The \mscpack{} is still under development. The authors
-appreciate any comments and suggestions for improvements. The most
-recent version of the package can be downloaded from
-\url{http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/}.
-
-
-The \mscpack{} has a \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}
-(LPPL), see~\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}:
-{\small
-\verbatiminput{COPYRIGHT}
-} As such, it is free of charge and can be freely
-distributed. Furthermore, it is allowed to make modifications to the
-package, provided that modified versions get different names. The
-authors accept no liability with respect to the functioning of the
-package.
-
-The \mscpack{} runs with \LaTeXe. It has been tested with \LaTeXe\
-version dated 1998/06/01 using \TeX\ version 3.14159. The following
-additional packages are required: \textsf{pstricks}, \textsf{calc},
-\textsf{ifthen}, and \textsf{color}. These packages are in general
-part of the standard \LaTeXe\ distribution. These additional packages
-can be obtained from the {\em ctan} database for \LaTeX\, e.g.\ via
-the following URL: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}. The \textsf{pstricks}
-package is described in~\cite[Chapter~4]{GSM97}. The generated output
-can only be previewed with recent previewing software (e.g.\ xdvi
-version 20c). It may be needed to update all \LaTeX\ related software
-to a more recent version in order to smoothly work with the \mscpack.
-
-The \mscpack{} can be installed easily. Just put the file
-\verb+msc.sty+ in a directory which is searched by \LaTeX{} for style
-files. The set of directories actually searched depends on the \TeX\
-installation, but often the {\em current directory} is included. UNIX
-users may have to set the environment variable \texttt{\$TEXINPUTS} to
-an appropriate value. For more details on this topic consult
-documentation of your \TeX\ installation.
-
-%The following text is currently not applicable -sm
-%
-%A problem may occur when using more packages than the \MSC{} macro
-%package in your \LaTeX\ document. This happens, e.g.\ when using the
-%{\em epsfig} package. These problems are due to the combination of
-%several packages which are required (but not provided) by the \MSC{}
-%macro package. The solution is to change the order of the
-%\verb+usepackage+ clauses.
-
-\section{Quick start}
-\label{quickstart}
-The \mscpack{} is easy to use.
-Below is an example of the use of the package and
-Figure~\ref{quick} shows the generated \MSC{}.
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass{article}
-\usepackage{msc}
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-
-\declinst{usr}{User}{}
-\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}
-\declinst{m2}{Machine 2}{drill}
-\declinst{m3}{Machine 3}{test}
-
-\mess{startm1}{usr}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{startm2}{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{continue}{m2}{m3}
-\mess{log}{m1}{envleft}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{output}{m3}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{free}{m1}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\end{msc}
-
-\end{document}
-
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-
-\declinst{usr}{User}{}
-\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}
-\declinst{m2}{Machine 2}{drill}
-\declinst{m3}{Machine 3}{test}
-
-\mess{startm1}{usr}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{startm2}{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{continue}{m2}{m3}
-\mess{log}{m1}{envleft}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{output}{m3}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{free}{m1}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\end{msc}
-
-\end{center}
-\caption{The generated \MSC{}}
-\label{quick}
-\end{figure}
-
-The \mscpack{} is activated by the clause
-\verb+\usepackage{msc}+.
-This package contains, among others, a
-definition of the environment \verb+msc+.
-This environment is used to draw \MSC{}s. The \MSC{} definition is surrounded by
-the clauses \verb+\begin{msc}{Example}+ and \verb+\end{msc}+. The name of
-the \MSC{}, {\tt Example}, is displayed in the upper-left corner of the
-\MSC{}.
-
-The next four lines define the \emph{instances}:
-\verb+\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}+ defines an instance with
-\emph{nickname} \verb+m1+ and a description consisting of two parts,
-namely, \verb+Machine 1+ and \verb+control+. The nickname is used in
-all subsequent references to this instance. The first part of the
-description is drawn above the rectangular instance head symbol, and
-the second part of the description is drawn inside the instance head
-symbol.
-
-The following lines contain the definitions of the messages. Every
-message has a source and a destination instance. The clause
-\verb+\mess{startm1}{usr}{m1}+ defines a message with name {\tt
-startm1}, which goes from instance {\tt usr} to instance {\tt m1}.
-
-In order to control the vertical placement of the messages, the \MSC{} is
-divided into levels. At every level, any number of messages may start.
-The vertical position of the end point of a message is determined
-by the optional fourth argument of the message definition, as in the
-clause \verb+\mess{output}{m2}{user}[2]+.
-This argument is the vertical offset (in number of levels) between the
-start point of the message (i.e.\ the current level) and its end point.
-If the value is 0 the message is drawn horizontally. A negative offset
-means that the arrow has an upward slope.
-
-The clause \verb+\nextlevel+ is used to advance to the next level.
-
-\section{Use of the \mscpack}
-\label{use}
-
-\subsection{The \MSC{} frame}
-\label{mscframe}
-The \verb+msc+ environment is used for making \MSC{} definitions. Thus, such a
-definition looks as follows.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}[headerpos]{mscname}
-...definition of the MSC...
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This draws the frame and the header of the \MSC{}.
-The argument \verb+mscname+ is the name of the \MSC{}.
-The header of an \MSC{} is formed from the keyword \verb+msc+, followed
-by the \verb+mscname+. Positioning of this header is controlled by
-the optional argument \verb+headerpos+. This argument can have values
-\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
-and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header).
-The default value of \verb+headerpos+ is \verb+l+.
-
-The size of the \MSC{} frame is determined vertically by the number of levels
-occurring in the \MSC{} (see Section~\ref{levels}) and horizontally by
-the number of instances (see Section~\ref{instances}).
-
-The parameter \verb+\topnamedist+ controls the distance between the
-top of the \MSC{} frame and the header (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-The parameter \verb+\leftnamedist+ controls the distance between the
-left of the \MSC{} frame and the header if the \verb+headerpos+ is
-\verb+l+ and it controls the distance between the right of the \MSC{}
-frame and the header if \verb+headerpos+ is \verb+r+ (see
-Section~\ref{parameters}).
-
-\subsection{Levels}
-\label{levels}
-An \MSC{} is vertically divided in {\em levels}. All events in an \MSC{} are
-attached to a certain level, or stretch out over several levels.
-Any number of events can be drawn at a certain level.
-An event will always be drawn (or started) at the current level, unless a level
-offset is specified (see e.g.\ the \verb+\mess+ command in
-Section~\ref{messages}). The level offset is an integer number, which
-denotes at which level, relative to the current level, an event should
-be drawn.
-Drawing starts at level 0.
-The following command is used to advance to the next level.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\nextlevel[leveloffset]
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \verb+leveloffset+ is an integer value which denotes the number of
-levels to advance. By default, the value of \verb+leveloffset+ is 1,
-which means drawing continues at the next level. Setting
-\verb+leveloffset+ to a negative value may result in unexpected
-drawings, however, see the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference
-manual~\cite{BM02}.
-
-There are three parameters which control the size of the levels (see
-Section~\ref{parameters}). These are \verb+\firstlevelheight+ (the
-distance between the instance start symbol and the first level),
-\verb+\levelheight+ (the distance between two consecutive levels), and
-\verb+\lastlevelheight+ (the distance between the last level and the
-instance end symbol). Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on
-page~\pageref{parametersfig} shows all lengths of the \mscpack.
-
-\subsection{Instances}
-\label{instances}
-All instances have to be declared before they can be used. An instance
-consists of an instance head symbol with an associated name, an
-instance axis and an instance end symbol. Normal instances have a
-single line axis. Fat instances have a double line axis. The order of
-the instance declarations determines the order in which the instances
-occur in the drawing.
-
-An instance is declared with the following command.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\declinst(*){nickname}{instancenameabove}{instancenamewithin}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The starred version produces a fat instance.
-The \verb+nickname+ is used for referring to this instance in the rest of the
-\MSC{} definition.
-The \verb+instancenameabove+ is put above the instance head symbol.
-The \verb+instancenamewithin+ is put inside the instance head symbol.
-
-Several parameters allow the user to customize the shape and
-positioning of instances (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
-\verb+\topheaddist+ (the distance between the top of the \MSC{} and the
-instance head symbol), \verb+\instheadheight+ (the height of the
-instance head symbol), \verb+\instfootheight+ (the height of the
-instance foot symbol), \verb+\bottomfootdist+ (the distance between
-the instance foot symbol and the bottom of the \MSC{} frame),
-\verb+\instwidth+ (the width of the instance head and foot symbols),
-\verb+\instdist+ (the distance between two instance axes),
-\verb+\envinstdist+ (the distance between the edge of the \MSC{} and the
-first/last instance axis), and \verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between
-the instance head symbol and the part of the instance name drawn above
-the head symbol). The command \verb+\setfootcolor{color}+ sets the
-fill color of the footer symbol. Valid color values are, e.g.,
-\texttt{black} (default), \texttt{white}, and \texttt{gray}.
-
-The following \MSC{} shows the declaration of an \MSC{} with three
-instances. The first and the last are normal instances (one line axis)
-whereas the second is a fat instance (double line axis). The second
-line, \verb+\setmscvalues{small}+, indicates that the small drawing
-style should be used (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}[l]{instances}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-
-\declinst{i}{above}{within}
-\declinst*{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{k}{}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{instances}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-
-\declinst{i}{above}{within}
-\declinst*{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{k}{}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Messages}
-\label{messages}
-A message is denoted by an arrow from the sending instance to the
-receiving instance. The instances are referred to by their nicknames.
-A message is defined with the following command.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess(*)[pos]{name}[labelpos]{sender}[placement]{receiver}[leveloffset]
-\end{verbatim}
-The \verb+name+ of the message may be any string. The \mscpack{}
-processes the \verb+name+ argument in LR-mode,
-see~\cite[page~36]{Lam94}. This means that the string will consist of
-one line. To generate multi-line message names, use the standard
-\cmd{parbox} command, see the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference
-manual~\cite{BM02}. By default, the name of a message label is drawn
-above the center of the arrow, but the optional parameters \verb+pos+,
-\verb+labelpos+, and \verb+placement+ influence the actual location,
-as described below. The arrow starts at the current level at the
-sending instance. The arrow ends at the current level plus the
-\verb+leveloffset+, at the receiving instance. The \verb+leveloffset+
-is an optional integer argument with default value 0. The
-\verb+sender+ and \verb+receiver+ should be the nicknames of declared
-instances.
-
-In case the sending and the receiving instance are the same, the
-message is a \emph{self message}. A self message is drawn as a
-polyline connecting the instance axis to itself.
-
-The starred version of the command, \verb+\mess*+, produces the same
-result as \verb+\mess+, except that the arrow is drawn with a dashed
-line. This can be used to draw a {\em method reply} (see~\cite{z120}).
-
-As mentioned above, placement of the message and its label is
-controlled by the optional parameters \verb+pos+, \verb+labelpos+, and
-\verb+placement+. In case of a self message, \verb+pos+ denotes the
-position of the arrow with respect to the instance axis. Valid values
-are \verb+l+ (left) and \verb+r+ (right). The default value is
-\verb+l+. In case of a non-self message, the \verb+pos+ parameter is
-ignored.
-
-Whereas the \verb+pos+ parameter defines the position of the arrow
-symbol with respect to the instance axis, the \verb+labelpos+
-parameter defines the position of the message label with
-respect to the message arrow. In case of a self message, valid values
-for \verb+labelpos+ are \verb+l+ (left) and~\verb+r+ (right). The
-default value is equal to the, possibly user defined, value of the
-\verb+pos+ parameter. In case of a non-self message, valid values for
-\verb+labelpos+ are \verb+t+ (on top) and~\verb+b+ (below). The
-default value is~\verb+t+.
-
-Finally, the \verb+placement+ parameter defines the relative distance
-of the message label to the beginning of the message. Valid values are
-real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$. The default value
-is~$0.5$. While drawing a message, the \mscpack{} computes the
-coordinates of the message label using \verb+placement+ and the length
-and coordinates of the arrow. It then computes a \emph{reference
-point} for the message label and places it on the coordinates just
-computed. Figures \ref{fig:refpoints} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints})
-and~\ref{fig:refpoints:B} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints:B})
-schematically show the reference points for message labels. In the
-first figure, the labels are located at the default position. In the
-second figure, all labels are shifted along the arrow by setting
-$\verb+placement+ = 0.9$. The \verb+\lost+ and \verb+\found+ commands
-(Section~\ref{lostfound}) and the \verb+\create+
-(Section~\ref{createstop}) command use the same method to determine
-reference points and message label locations. Note that the boxes with
-the location of the reference points are not generated by the \LaTeX{}
-code given in Figures \ref{fig:refpoints} and~\ref{fig:refpoints:B};
-we enriched the \LaTeX{} code with some extra \textsf{pstricks} code
-(see \LaTeX{} source code of this document).
-
-In addition to label position control, there are three ways to control
-the shape of messages (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are:
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (a parameter to specify the width of the
-polyline used for drawing self-messages), \verb+\labeldist+ (a
-parameter to specify the distance between the label of a message and
-the message arrow), and \verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set
-the size of the arrow head of a message). \verb+size+ should be
-positive real number.
-
-Messages to or from the environment (i.e.\ the left or the right side
-of the \MSC{} frame) can be
-specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to one of the values
-\verb+envleft+ or \verb+envright+. (Note: Since instances and
-environments are treated equally in the implementation, at every position
-where the nickname of an instance is required, also
-\verb+envleft+ and \verb+envright+ are allowed.)
-
-The following \MSC{} shows an example of the use of messages.
-In this sample \MSC{} and the following \MSC{}s in this section we will
-not list the complete textual representations of the \MSC{}s. For brevity
-we omit the environment call and the declarations of the instances.
-Note the final \verb+\nextlevel+ command which is needed
-to make the instance axis long enough to receive message
-\verb+a+.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{messages}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{a}{j}{i}[3]
-\mess{self}{i}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess*{b}{j}{k}
-\mess[b]{c}{k}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{k}[.6]{i}
-\nextlevel
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{a}{j}{i}[3]
-\mess{self}{i}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess*{b}{j}{k}
-\mess[b]{c}{k}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{k}[.6]{i}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of shifted message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints:B}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\subsection{Comments}
-\label{comments}
-
-Comments are additional texts to clarify (events on) an instance. The
-following command can be used to add comments to an \MSC{} diagram.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\msccomment[position]{text}{instname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \verb|instname| parameter defines the instance to which the
-comment is attached. The text of the comment is specified by the
-\verb|text| parameter and is processed in LR-mode. The \verb|position|
-parameter defines the horizontal position of the comment relative to
-its instance. Valid values of \verb|position| are \verb|l| (left),
-\verb|r| (right), or any \LaTeX{} length. Its default value
-is~\verb|l|. If the value of \verb|position| is \verb|l|
-(or~\verb|r|), the comment will be placed \verb|\msccommentdist| units
-to the left (or right) of the \verb|instname| instance. If
-\verb|position| is a \LaTeX{} length, the comment will be placed
-\verb|position| units from the \verb|instname| instance. A negative
-length puts the comment to the left and a positive length puts the
-comment to the right of the instance.
-
-The following diagram shows how to use comments. In this diagram, the
-distance between the frame and the instances (\verb|\envinstdist|) is
-doubled in order to fit the comments inside the frame.
-
-\medskip
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{msc}{comments}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}{2\envinstdist}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\mess{a}{i}{j}[2]
-\msccomment{start}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\msccomment[r]{end}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.54\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}{2\envinstdist}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\mess{a}{i}{j}[2]
-\msccomment{start}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\msccomment[r]{end}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-
-
-\subsection{Actions}
-\label{actions}
-An instance can perform an action, which is denoted by a rectangle.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\action(*){name}{instance}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The action is attached at the current level to the \verb+instance+.
-The \verb+name+ is centered inside the action symbol and is processed
-in LR-mode.
-
-The following parameters determine the detailed drawing of the action
-symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\actionwidth+ (the width of the action symbol), and
-\verb+\actionheight+ (the height of the action symbol).
-
-The starred version of the command, \verb+\action*+, produces the same
-result as \verb+\action+, except that the height and width of the
-action symbol are adjusted to fit the contents of the rectangle.
-
-The next example shows that after an action often a multiple level
-increment is needed to obtain nice pictures.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{action}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-%\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-
-\mess{a}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\action{doit}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{i}{j}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{a}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\action{doit}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{i}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Timers}
-\label{timers}
-There are five commands to draw timer events.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\settimer[placement]{name}{instance}
-\timeout[placement]{name}{instance}
-\stoptimer[placement]{name}{instance}
-\settimeout[placement]{name}{instance}[offset]
-\setstoptimer[placement]{name}{instance}[offset]
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Setting of a timer is drawn as a line connecting the \verb+instance+
-to the {\em hour glass} symbol. The \verb+name+ is put near this
-symbol. A time-out is represented by an arrow from an
-{\em hour glass} symbol to the \verb+instance+. Stopping a timer is
-drawn as a line connecting the \verb+instance+ with the timer stop
-symbol (denoted by a cross).
-The command \verb+\settimeout+ is a combination of the setting of a
-timer and a time out. The \verb+offset+ denotes the number of levels
-between the two events. The default value for \verb+offset+ is 2.
-Likewise, \verb+\setstoptimer+ is a combination
-of the setting of a timer and stopping a timer.
-
-The optional argument \verb+placement+ can have values
-\verb+l+ (meaning that the timer is drawn left of the instance axis)
-and \verb+r+ (meaning that the timer is drawn right of the instance
-axis). By default it is drawn at the left side of the instance.
-
-Several parameters can be used to control the detailed layout of timer
-symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\timerwidth+ (the width of the hour glass and time out symbols),
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (the length of the arm between the symbol
-and the instance axis), and
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between the name and the timersymbol).
-Furthermore, the size of the arrow head can be controlled with the
-command \verb+\messarrowscale{size}+.
-
-The various timer symbols are shown in the following example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{timers}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\settimer{T,50}{j}
-\setstoptimer[r]{V}{k}[6]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\timeout{T}{j}
-\settimeout{U}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\settimer[r]{T,20}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stoptimer[r]{T}{j}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\settimer{T,50}{j}
-\setstoptimer[r]{V}{k}[6]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\timeout{T}{j}
-\settimeout{U}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\settimer[r]{T,20}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stoptimer[r]{T}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Time measurements}
-\label{measurements}
-There are several commands to add time measurements to an \MSC{}.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mscmark[placement]{name}{instance}
-\measure(*)[placement]{name}{instance1}{instance2}[offset]
-\measurestart(*)[placement]{name}{instance}{gate}
-\measureend(*)[placement]{name}{instance}{gate}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-An absolute time stamp is attached to an event on an \verb+instance+
-with the command
-\verb+mscmark+. The \verb+name+ is the text attached to the mark symbol,
-which is a dashed polyline.
-The position of the mark symbol relative to the marked event is
-determined by the \verb+placement+.
-(\verb+tl+ means top-left, \verb+tr+ means top-right, \verb+bl+ means
-bottom-left, and \verb+br+ means bottom-right).
-
-A \verb+\measure+ connects two events from \verb+instance1+ and
-\verb+instance2+. The first event is at the current level. The second
-event is \verb+offset+ levels lower than the first event. The
-\verb+name+ is attached to the measure symbol. The measure symbol can
-be placed at the left or at the right of \verb+instance1+. This is
-controlled by the optional argument \verb+placement+, which can have
-values \verb+l+ and \verb+r+.
-
-In case the two events are far apart, the measure may be split in two
-parts. The first part is drawn with the \verb+\measurestart+ command
-and the second part with the \verb+\measureend+ command. The points
-where these two parts should be connected are drawn by a small circle,
-to which the text \verb+gate+ is attached.
-
-There are two equivalent forms of the measurement symbol. The first
-form, where the arrow heads are at the inside of the measured
-interval, is the default form. The second form, where the arrow heads
-are at the outside of the measured interval, is obtained by the
-commands \verb+\measure*+, \verb+\measurestart*+, and
-\verb+\measureend*+.
-
-
-Several parameters can be used to control the detailed layout of the
-time measurement symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\labeldist+ (a parameter to specify the distance between the
-label of a measurement and the measurement symbol),
-\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
-head),
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (specifies the width of the measurement
-symbols).
-
-The following example illustrates marks and measurements in an \MSC{}. In
-order to include the marks inside the frame of the diagram, the
-distance between the frame and the instances (called
-\verb+\envinstdist+) is increased (before the instances are declared).
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{Time measurements}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}
- {2\envinstdist}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{m1}{i}{j}[1]
-\mscmark{t=0.0}{i}
-\measure{0.6}{i}{j}[4]
-\nextlevel
-\mscmark[tr]{t=0.3}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m2}{j}{k}
-\measurestart*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel[6]
-\mess{m3}{k}{i}
-\mscmark[bl]{t=1.0}{i}
-\measureend*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.44\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlength{\envinstdist}
- {2\envinstdist}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-\mess{m1}{i}{j}[1]
-\mscmark{t=0.0}{i}
-\measure{0.6}{i}{j}[4]
-\nextlevel
-\mscmark[tr]{t=0.3}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m2}{j}{k}
-\measurestart*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel[6]
-\mess{m3}{k}{i}
-\mscmark[bl]{t=1.0}{i}
-\measureend*[r]{0.2}{k}{g}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Lost and found messages}
-\label{lostfound}
-A lost message is denoted by an arrow starting at an instance and
-ending at a filled circle. A found message is denoted by an arrow
-starting at an open circle and ending at an instance.
-
-The following commands are used to define lost and found messages.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\lost[pos]{name}[labelpos]{gate}{instance}[placement]
-\found[pos]{name}[labelpos]{gate}{instance}[placement]
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The argument \verb+instance+ determines the instance to which the
-arrow is attached. The \verb+name+ of the message is put above the
-message arrow. The \verb+gate+ is a text associated to the circle.
-The optional arguments \verb+pos+, \verb+labelpos+, and
-\verb+placement+ have the same function as in the \verb+\mess+ command
-(Section~\ref{messages}). That is, \verb+pos+ controls the placement
-of the lost or or found message with respect to the instance
-axis. Valid values are \verb+l+ (left) and~\verb+r+ (right). The
-default value is~\verb+l+. The optional parameters \verb+labelpos+
-and \verb+placement+ control the placement of \verb+name+ with respect
-to the message arrow. Valid values for \verb+labelpos+ are \verb+t+
-(on top) and~\verb+b+ (below). The default value is~\verb+t+. Valid
-values for \verb+placement+ are real numbers in the closed interval
-$[0,1]$ and denote the relative distance of the message label
-\verb+name+ to the beginning of the arrow. The default value for
-\verb+placement+ is~$0.5$.
-
-Several parameters can be used to control the detailed layout of lost
-and found messages (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\lostsymbolradius+ (the radius of the circle),
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (the length of the arrow), and
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between the name and the arrow).
-Furthermore, the size of the arrow head can be controlled with the
-command \verb+\messarrowscale{size}+.
-
-The following example shows a found and a lost message.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{lost and found}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-
-\found{m}{g}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{p}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\lost[r]{n}{}{j}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\found{m}{g}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{p}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\lost[r]{n}{}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-
-\subsection{Conditions}
-\label{conditions}
-A condition is denoted by a hexagon. It is used to express that the
-system has entered a certain state. A condition relates to a number of
-instances. All conditions which take part in the condition are covered
-by the condition symbol. The other instances are drawn through the
-condition symbol.
-The following command is used to draw a condition.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\condition{text}{instancelist}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The \verb+text+ is placed in the center of the condition. The
-\verb+instancelist+ expresses which instances take part in the
-condition. It is a list of nicknames of instances, separated by
-commas. Take care not to add extra white space around the nicknames,
-since this is considered part of the nickname in \LaTeX.
-The order in which the instances are listed is immaterial.
-
-There are two parameters which control the shape of the condition
-symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\conditionheight+ (the height of the condition symbol), and
-\verb+\conditionoverlap+ (the width of the part of the condition
-symbol which extends over the rightmost/leftmost contained instance
-axis).
-
-The starred version of the command, \verb+\condition*+, produces the same
-result as \verb+\condition+, except that the height and width of the
-condition symbol are adjusted to fit the contents of the hexagon.
-
-The following example contains some conditions.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{conditions}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\condition{some condition}{i,k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\action{a}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\condition{C}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\condition{A, B, C}{i,j,k}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\condition{some condition}{i,k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\action{a}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\condition{C}{i}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\condition{A, B, C}{i,j,k}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Generalized ordering}
-\label{ordering}
-A generalized order is treated much like a regular message (see
-Section~\ref{messages}). There
-are three differences: a generalized order is drawn with a
-dotted line, it has no label, and the arrow head is in the middle of
-the line. A generalized order is defined with the following command.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\order[pos]{sender}{receiver}[leveloffset]
-\end{verbatim}
-The \verb+sender+ and \verb+receiver+ are the nicknames of the
-instances which are connected by the generalized ordering symbol.
-At the \verb+receiver+ instance, the generalized ordering symbol ends
-at the current level plus the \verb+leveloffset+. The
-\verb+leveloffset+ is an optional integer value, with default 0.
-
-In case \verb+sender+ and \verb+receiver+ denote the same instance,
-the order is a \emph{self order}. The placement of the order arrow of
-a self order is controlled by the optional argument \verb+pos+. It
-can have values \verb+l+ (meaning that the ordering symbol is drawn
-left of the instance axis) and \verb+r+ (meaning that the ordering
-symbol is drawn right of the instance axis). By default it is drawn at
-the left side of the instance. For non-self orders, the \verb+pos+
-argument is ignored.
-
-Additionally, there are two ways to control the shape
-of the generalized ordering symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-These are:
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+ (a parameter to specify the width of the polyline used for
-drawing orderings on a single instance axis).
-and
-\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
-head in the ordering symbol).
-
-Orderings to or from the environment (i.e.\ the left or the right side
-of the \MSC{} frame) can be
-specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to the value
-\verb+envleft+ or \verb+envright+.
-
-An example of a generalized order is given in the following diagram.
-
-
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{generalized order}
-\setmscvalues{normal}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-
-\mess{m}{envleft}{i}
-\order{i}{j}[1]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{k}{j}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{m}{envleft}{i}
-\order{i}{j}[1]
-\nextlevel
-\mess{k}{j}{envright}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{Instance regions}
-\label{regions}
-A part of the instance axis can be drawn in a different style. Such a
-part is called an {\em instance region}. The following
-regions are supported:
-{\em coregion} (the instance axis is dashed, which means that the order of the
-attached instances is immaterial),
-{\em suspension region} (a small rectangle with dashed left and right
-sides, which denotes that the instance is suspended),
-{\em activation region} (a small filled rectangle, which denotes that
-the instance has control).
-
-The following commands are used to draw an instance region.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\regionstart{type}{instname}
-\regionend{instname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-If the \verb+\regionstart+ command is used the instance axis of
-\verb+instname+ is drawn in the shape determined by \verb+type+,
-starting from the current level. The type can have values
-\verb+coregion+, \verb+suspension+, and \verb+activation+.
-
-The shape of an instance region can be controlled with the following
-parameters (see Section~\ref{parameters}):
-\verb+\regionbarwidth+ (the width of the coregion start and end
-symbol),
-\verb+\instwidth+ (the width of the fat instance rectangle),
-\verb+\regionwidth+ (the width of the activation and suspension rectangle).
-
-In the following example, several instance regions are demonstrated.
-Notice the relative order of \verb|\mess|, \verb|\regionstart|, and
-\verb|\regionend| commands. Interchanging lines
-\verb|\regionstart{activation}{i}| and \verb|\mess{q}{j}{i}| makes the
-arrow head of the~`q' message partly invisible. Also note that the
-second activation region on~$i$ ends with a method reply
-(which is produced by the command \cmd{mess*}).
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{regions}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{coregion}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{suspension}{k}
-\mess{p}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\mess{q}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess*{r}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{s}{j}{k}
-\regionend{k}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess{m}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{coregion}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{suspension}{k}
-\mess{p}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\regionstart{activation}{i}
-\mess{q}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{i}
-\mess*{r}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{s}{j}{k}
-\regionend{k}
-\nextlevel
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-In some situations, the gray-colored activation regions can hide
-message-labels. \emph{Level back-up} can help in these situations, see
-the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference manual~\cite{BM02}.
-
-\subsection{Instance creation and instance stop}
-\label{createstop}
-The \MSC{} language offers constructs for dynamic instance creation and
-instance destruction.
-An instance can dynamically create another instance by issuing a
-create command. An instance creation is drawn as a dashed message
-arrow. At the side of the arrow head, the instance head symbol for the
-created instance is drawn.
-An instance end symbol does not denote the end of the specified
-process, but merely the end of its current description. Therefore, a
-different symbol is needed which denotes that an instance stops before
-the end of the \MSC{} in which it is contained.
-The instance stop symbol is a cross.
-
-The following commands are used for instance creation and instance
-stop.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\dummyinst{createdinst}
-\create{name}
- [labelpos]
- {creator}
- [placement]
- {createdinst}
- {instancenameabove}
- {instancenamewithin}
-\stop{instance}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In order to reserve space for an instance which will be created
-dynamically, the command \verb+dummyinst+ must be used. This command
-is mixed with the declarations of normal instances (see the
-\verb+declinst+ command, Section~\ref{instances}).
-The argument \verb+createdinst+ is the nickname of the instance that
-will be created later.
-
-An instance can be created with the \verb+\create+ command.
-This command results in a dashed horizontal message arrow labeled with
-\verb+name+. The arrow starts at the current level at the instance
-with nickname \verb+creator+ and ends at the current level at the
-instance head of the instance with nickname \verb+createdinst+. This
-instance must have been declared first with the \verb+dummyinst+
-command.
-The name of the created instance consists of two parts. The part
-called \verb+instancenameabove+ is placed above the instance head and the
-\verb+instancenamewithin+ is centered within the instance head.
-
-As with normal messages, placement of the message label is controlled
-by the optional parameters \verb+labelpos+ and \verb+placement+. That
-is, \verb+labelpos+ denotes the relative position of the message label
-with respect to the message arrow. Valid values are \verb+t+ (on top)
-and \verb+b+ (below). The default value is \verb+t+. The optional
-parameter \verb+placement+ denotes the relative distance of the
-message label with respect to the beginning of the arrow. Valid values
-are real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$. The default value
-is~$0.5$. See Figure~\ref{fig:refpoints}
-(page~\pageref{fig:refpoints}) and its description in
-Section~\ref{messages} for more information on the placement of
-message labels.
-
-An instance is stopped with the \verb+\stop+ command.
-The \verb+instance+ is the nickname of the stopped instance. The
-instance axis is not drawn any further below the level at which the
-\verb+\stop+ command is issued. Also, the instance foot symbol is not
-drawn.
-
-The size of the stop symbol is determined by the parameter
-\verb+\stopwidth+ (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-The following parameters apply to the instance head symbol:
-\verb+\instheadheight+ (the height of the instance head symbol),
-\verb+\instwidth+ (the width of the instance head symbol),
-and
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the distance between the instance head symbol and
-the part of the instance name drawn above the head symbol).
-
-Take care not to specify any events on an instance which has not yet
-been created or which has already
-been stopped. This may lead to unexpected drawings.
-However, it is possible to create an instance after it has stopped,
-as showed in the next example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{dynamic instances}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\dummyinst{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{p}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\create{kick}{k}{j}{}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{ok}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\create{start}[b]{i}[.75]{k}{}{again}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\dummyinst{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{p}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\create{kick}{k}{j}{}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{ok}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\stop{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\create{start}[b]{i}[.75]{k}{}{again}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{\MSC{} references}
-\label{references}
-Within an \MSC{} a reference to other \MSC{}s can be included. Such a
-reference is drawn as a rectangle with rounded corners, covering part
-of the \MSC{}. The following commands are used to draw \MSC{} references.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\referencestart[lo][ro]{nickname}{text}{leftinstance}{rightinstance}
-\referenceend{nickname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The reference symbol starts at the level where the
-\verb+\referencestart+ command is used, and ends at the level where
-the corresponding \verb+\referenceend+ command occurs. These commands
-correspond if they have the same \verb+nickname+. The \verb+text+ is
-placed in the center of the reference symbol. The reference covers all
-instances from \verb+leftinstance+ to \verb+rightinstance+. The
-distance between the left (right) edge of the reference symbol and the
-leftmost (rightmost) covered instance axis is defined by the optional
-overlap value \verb+lo+. The default value for \verb+lo+ in large/normal/small
-\MSC{}s is 1.5/1/0.75 (see Section~\ref{parameters} for selecting
-large, normal or small drawing mode). If the second optional value
-\verb+ro+ is present too, the optional value \verb+lo+ defines the left
-overlap and the optional value \verb+ro+ defines the right overlap.
-
-The left and right edge of the reference symbol are
-\verb+nicknameleft+ and \verb+nicknameright+, where \verb+nickname+ is
-the nickname of the \MSC{} reference as defined in the
-\verb+\referencestart+ command.
-These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
-instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
-This is shown in the following example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{references}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-\mess{a}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{r}{a reference}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{b}{rright}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referenceend{r}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{p}{another reference}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{envright}{pright}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\referenceend{p}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.55\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\mess{a}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{r}{a reference}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{b}{rright}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\referenceend{r}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{p}{another reference}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{envright}{pright}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\referenceend{p}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Inline expressions}
-\label{inlines}
-An inline expression is a part of an \MSC{} on which an operation is
-defined. A rectangle surrounds the part of the \MSC{} containing the
-operands. The operands are separated by horizontal dashed lines.
-The operator is placed in the upper left corner of the inline
-expression symbol.
-The following commands are used to draw inline expressions.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\inlinestart[lo][ro]{nickname}{operator}{leftinstance}{rightinstance}
-\inlineseparator{nickname}
-\inlineend(*){nickname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The inline expression starts at the level where the \verb+\inlinestart+
-command occurs. The inline expression spans over the instances from
-\verb+leftinstance+ to \verb+rightinstance+. The \verb+operand+ is
-placed in the upper left corner of the rectangle. At every level where
-a corresponding \verb+\inlineseparator+ command occurs, a dashed line
-is drawn. The inline expression ends at the level where the
-\verb+\inlineend+ command occurs. The \verb+nickname+ is used to match
-corresponding commands.
-The command \verb+\inlineend*+ does the same as the command
-\verb+\inlineend+, except that the bottom line of the rectangle is
-dashed. This is used to indicate that the operand is optional.
-
-The left and right edge of the inline expression symbol are named
-\verb+nicknameleft+ and \verb+nicknameright+, where \verb+nickname+ is
-the nickname of the inline expression as defined in the
-\verb+\inlinestart+ command.
-These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
-instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
-
-The distance between the left (right) edge of the inline expression
-symbol and
-the leftmost (rightmost) included instance axis is defined by
-the optional overlap value \verb+lo+. The default value for
-large/normal/small \MSC{}s is
-1.5/1/0.75 (see Section~\ref{parameters} for selecting large, normal or small
-drawing mode).
-If the second optional value
-\verb+ro+ is present too, the optional value \verb+lo+ defines the left
-overlap and the optional value \verb+ro+ defines the right overlap.
-These options make it possible to easily draw nested inline expressions
-as in the following example.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{inline expressions}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\setlength{\topheaddist}{0.8cm}
-
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-
-
-\inlinestart{exp1}{par}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{k}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart[0.6cm]{exp2}{alt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart{exp3}{opt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{e}{envright}{exp3right}
-\mess{e}{exp3right}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{f}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend*{exp3}
-
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\scriptsize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\inlinestart{exp1}{par}{i}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{k}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart[0.6cm]{exp2}{alt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp2}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineseparator{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{d}{j}{k}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend{exp1}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart{exp3}{opt}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{e}{envright}{exp3right}
-\mess{e}{exp3right}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{f}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\inlineend*{exp3}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-\subsection{Gates}
-\label{gates}
-
-A gate determines a connection point for messages.
-
-The following command can be used to draw gates.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\gate(*)[hpos][vpos]{gatename}{instname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The unstarred version produces a normal (invisible) gate. The starred
-version produces a visible gate (a small dot). The gate is drawn at the
-current level at the instance \verb+instname+ (which can also be the
-left and right edge of e.g.\ an \MSC{} reference). The
-\verb+gatename+ is attached to the gate. The positioning of the
-\verb+gatename+ relative to the gate is determined by the values of
-\verb+hpos+ (horizontal position) and \verb+vpos+ (vertical position).
-Possible values for \verb+hpos+ are \verb+l+ (left, default) and
-\verb+right+ (right). Possible values for \verb+vpos+ are \verb+t+
-(top, default), \verb+c+ (center), and \verb+b+ (bottom).
-
-There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
-gate symbol (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
-\verb+\gatesymbolradius+ (sets the radius of the gate symbol),
-\verb+\labeldist+ (the vertical distance between the gate name and
-the gate).
-
-The next example shows a number of gates.
-
-\medskip
-
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{msc}{gates}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-\referencestart{r}{ref}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\gate{$g$}{rright}
-\mess{b}{rright}{envright}
-\gate[r][c]{$h$}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{rright}{k}
-\gate*[l][b]{$h'$}{rright}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\referenceend{r}
-\end{msc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.5\linewidth}
-{\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\declinst{i}{}{i}
-\declinst{j}{}{j}
-\declinst{k}{}{k}
-\referencestart{r}{ref}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\gate{$g$}{rright}
-\mess{b}{rright}{envright}
-\gate[r][c]{$h$}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-\nextlevel
-\mess{c}{rright}{k}
-\gate*[l][b]{$h'$}{rright}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\referenceend{r}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{High-level \MSC{}s}
-\label{hmsc}
-A High-level \MSC{} (\HMSC{}) is a drawing which defines the relation between
-a number of \MSC{}s. It is composed of a start symbol (an upside down
-triangle), a number of end symbols (represented by triangles), a
-number of \MSC{} references (these are rectangles with rounded corners),
-a number of conditions (hexagons) and possibly several connection
-points (circles). These symbols are connected by arrows.
-
-The following commands can be used to draw \HMSC{}s.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{hmsc}[headerpos]{hmscname}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
-\end{hmsc}
-\hmscstartsymbol{nickname}(x,y)
-\hmscendsymbol{nickname}(x,y)
-\hmscreference{nickname}{text}(x,y)
-\hmsccondition{nickname}{text}(x,y)
-\hmscconnection{nickname}(x,y)
-\arrow{from-nickname}[coord-list]{to-nickname}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In order to draw \HMSC{}s, a new environment is defined, which is called
-\verb+hmsc+. The command to begin this environment has several
-arguments. The argument \verb+headerpos+ is optional. It controls
-positioning of the header of the \HMSC{}. This argument can have values
-\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
-and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header). The header of an \HMSC{} is
-formed from the keyword \verb+msc+, followed by the
-\verb+hmscname+. The size of the \HMSC{} frame is determined by the
-coordinates of the lower-left corner, \verb+(llx,lly)+, and the
-coordinates of the upper-right corner, \verb+(urx,ury)+.
-
-The \HMSC{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
-\HMSC{} symbols (\verb+startsymbol+, \verb+endsymbol+, \verb+reference+,
-\verb+condition+, and \verb+connection+).
-The center of each symbol is drawn on the grid point
-with coordinates \verb+{x,y}+. Each symbol also has a \verb+nickname+
-for later reference.
-
-\HMSC{} symbols can be connected by means of the \verb+arrow+ command.
-This draws an arrow from the symbol with nickname \verb+from-nickname+
-to the symbol with nickname \verb+to-nickname+. The optional argument
-\verb+coord-list+ can be used if the line connecting the source and
-the destination should not be straight. The \verb+coord-list+ has
-the following syntax: \verb+(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xk,yk)+. This means
-that the connecting line goes through the points with coordinates
-(x1,y1), (x2,y2), \ldots, (xk,yk).
-
-Arrows always leave the start symbol at the bottom. They enter the end symbol
-at the top.
-Arrows start and end either at the middle of the top or at the middle
-of the bottom of a reference and condition symbol. The incoming
-(outgoing) direction of the arrow determines whether it will start
-(end) at the top or at the bottom.
-
-There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
-symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
-\verb+\hmscconditionheight+ (the height of the condition symbol),
-\verb+\hmscconditionwidth+ (the width of the condition symbol,
-excluding the left and right angular parts),
-\verb+\hmscreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\hmscreferencewidth+ (the width of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
-head of a connection line);
-\verb+setconnectiontype(type)+ (set the shape of the polyline
-connection the symbols; \verb+type+ can be \verb+straight+,
-\verb+rounded+, and \verb+curved+),
-\verb+\startsymbolwidth+ (the width of the start and end symbol),
-\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \HMSC{} frame
-and the \HMSC{} header).
-
-An example of an \HMSC{} is in the following diagram. Notice that the
-width and height of reference symbols are changed locally (i.e.,
-between \verb+{+ and \verb+}+ braces) just before the big
-reference~\verb+b+ is defined.
-
-\medskip
-
-\noindent
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.375\linewidth}
-
-\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
-\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
-\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
-\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
-{
-\setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
-\setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{3\baselineskip}
-\hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
- {\centering
- this is a big
- hmsc reference}
- }(0,6)
-}
-\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.25)
-\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
-\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
-\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
-\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
-
-\arrow{s}{a}
-\arrow{a}{c}
-\arrow{c}{b}
-\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
-\arrow{b}{q}
-\arrow{q}{e1}
-\arrow{b}{ok}
-\arrow{ok}{do}
-\arrow{do}{e2}
-\arrow{b}{t}
-\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
-\end{hmsc}
-\end{minipage}\hfill
-\begin{minipage}[c]{0.6\linewidth}
-{\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
-\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
-\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
-\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
-{\setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
- \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}
- {3\baselineskip}
- \hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
- {\centering this is a big hmsc reference}
- }(0,6)}
-\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.5)
-\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
-\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
-\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
-\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
-\arrow{s}{a}
-\arrow{a}{c}
-\arrow{c}{b}
-\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
-\arrow{b}{q}
-\arrow{q}{e1}
-\arrow{b}{ok}
-\arrow{ok}{do}
-\arrow{do}{e2}
-\arrow{b}{t}
-\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
-\end{hmsc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-\subsection{\MSC{} documents}
-\label{mscdoc}
-An \MSCdoc{} is a drawing which contains various declarations
-of objects used in the \MSC{} description. For drawing \MSCdoc{}s
-he following commands are provided.
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{mscdoc}[headerpos]{mscdocname}{text}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\reference{text}(x,y)
-\separator{y}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-As for \MSC{} and \HMSC{}, a new environment is defined, which is named
-\verb+mscdoc+. The command to begin an \MSCdoc{} has several
-arguments. The argument \verb+headerpos+ is optional. It controls
-positioning of the header of the \MSCdoc{}.
-This argument can have values
-\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
-and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header).
-The header of an \MSCdoc{} is formed from the keyword \verb+mscdocument+,
-followed by the \verb+mscdocname+.
-The \verb+text+ is placed left-aligned below the \MSCdoc{} header.
-The size of the \MSCdoc{} frame is determined by
-coordinates of the lower-left corner, \verb+(llx,lly)+, and the
-coordinates of the upper-right corner, \verb+(urx,ury)+.
-
-The \MSCdoc{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
-\MSC{} references.
-The center of such a reference is drawn on the grid point
-with coordinates \verb+{x,y}+.
-
-The \verb+separator+ command draws a dashed horizontal line. The \MSC{}
-references above the separator are the exported, while the ones below
-the separator are local.
-
-There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
-symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
-\verb+\mscdocreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\mscdocreferencewidth+ (the width of the reference symbol),
-\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \MSCdoc{}
-frame and the \MSCdoc{} header).
-
-An example of an \MSCdoc{} is in the following diagram. Notice that
-the size of references in an \MSCdoc{} had to be changed for the last
-reference.
-
-\medskip
-
-
-\begin{minipage}{0.4\linewidth}
-\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
- (0,0)(6,8)
-\reference{a}(1,6)
-\reference{b}(3,6)
-\reference{c}(1,4)
-\reference{d}(3,4)
-\separator{3}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}{4.5\mscunit}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}{2\baselineskip}
-\reference{%
- \parbox{4\mscunit}%
- {\raggedright This is a
- two-line reference}}
- (3,1.5)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\end{minipage}
-%
-\begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
- (0,0)(6,8)
-\reference{a}(1,6)
-\reference{b}(3,6)
-\reference{c}(1,4)
-\reference{d}(3,4)
-\separator{3}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferencewidth}
- {4.5\mscunit}
-\setlength{\mscdocreferenceheight}
- {2\baselineskip}
-\reference{%
- \parbox{4\mscunit}%
- {\raggedright This is a
- two-line reference}}
- (3,1.5)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-\end{minipage}
-
-
-
-\section{Style parameters}
-\label{parameters}
-
-By means of a collection of parameters, the graphical appearance of
-an \MSC{} can be fine tuned to the user's taste.
-The general parameters
-are displayed in Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on page~\pageref{parametersfig}.
-
-%========================
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\vspace{2ex} %Needed to get enough white space before the top label of
- %the figure.
-
-\newcommand{\printlength}[1]{\mbox{\footnotesize\ttfamily \char`\\#1}}
-\begin{center}
-\setmscvalues{normal}
-\begin{msc}{Lengths}
-\psset{linewidth=.4pt,dotsep=1pt}
-\newlength{\lta}
-\newlength{\ltb}
-% \topnamedist
-\psline[linestyle=dotted](1.5cm,-\topnamedist)(2.5cm,-\topnamedist)
-\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(2.5cm,.2cm)(2.5cm,0cm)
-\setlength{\lta}{\topnamedist+.2cm}
-\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(2.5cm,-\lta)(2.5cm,-\topnamedist)
-\rput[tl](2.5cm,.4cm){\printlength{topnamedist}}
-
-% \leftnamedist
-\setlength{\lta}{\leftnamedist+10pt}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topnamedist}
-\psline[linestyle=dotted,arrowscale=1.0]{->}(-10pt,-\ltb)(0,-\ltb)
-\psline[linestyle=dotted,arrowscale=1.0]{->}(\lta,-\ltb)(\leftnamedist,-\ltb)
-\psline[linestyle=dotted](\leftnamedist,10pt)(\leftnamedist,-\baselineskip)
-\rput[br](-10pt,-\ltb){\printlength{leftnamedist}}
-
-% \topheaddist
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist-.5\instwidth}
-\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(\lta,0cm)(\lta,-\topheaddist)
-\rput[l](\lta,-.5\topheaddist){ \printlength{topheaddist}}
-
-% \bottomfootdist
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\lastlevelheight+\instfootheight+\levelheight*12}
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist-.5\instwidth}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\bottomfootdist)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\bottomfootdist}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{bottomfootdist}}
-
-% \instheadheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+.5\instwidth+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\instheadheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\instheadheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{instheadheight}}
-
-% \firstlevelheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,-\firstlevelheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\firstlevelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{firstlevelheight}}
-
-% \levelheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\levelheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\levelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{levelheight}}
-
-% \actionheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+0.5\actionwidth+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*7}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\actionheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.7\actionheight}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{actionheight}}
-
-% \actionwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist-0.5\actionwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*7-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\actionwidth,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+.5\actionwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{actionwidth}}
-
-% \conditionheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+\conditionoverlap+0.8\conditionheight}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*10}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\conditionheight)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.7\conditionheight}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{conditionheight}}
-
-% \inlineoverlap
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*5-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\inlineoverlap,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\inlineoverlap}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{inlineoverlap}}
-
-% \referenceoverlap
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*7-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\referenceoverlap,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\referenceoverlap}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{referenceoverlap}}
-
-% \conditionoverlap
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*10-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\conditionoverlap,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\conditionoverlap}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{conditionoverlap}}
-
-% \lastlevelheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+.2cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*12}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(0,-\lastlevelheight)}
-%\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+.5\lastlevelheight}
-\rput[bl](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{lastlevelheight}}
-
-% \instfootheight
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+.5\instwidth+.1cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*12+\lastlevelheight}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,.3cm)(0,0)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+\instfootheight}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,-.3cm)(0,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){ \printlength{instfootheight}}
-
-% \selfmesswidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-\selfmesswidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*2-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\selfmesswidth,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\selfmesswidth}
-\rput[r](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{selfmesswidth}}
-
-% \regionbarwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist-.5\regionbarwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*2-.2cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\regionbarwidth,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\regionbarwidth}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{regionbarwidth}}
-
-% \instwidth
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\lastlevelheight+\instfootheight+\levelheight*12+.2cm}
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-0.5\instwidth}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\instwidth,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){\rule{0pt}{2ex}\printlength{instwidth}}
-
-% \instdist
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+2.5\levelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\instdist,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+.5\instdist}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb-.1cm}
-\rput[b](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{instdist}}
-
-% \envinstwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{0cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+.5\levelheight}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\envinstdist,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){ \printlength{envinstdist}}
-
-
-% \labeldist
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-.5\instwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist-\labeldist}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted](-.2cm,0)(.5cm,0)}
-\rput[b](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(-.1cm,.3cm)(-.1cm,0)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted](-.2cm,0)(.5cm,0)}
-\rput[b](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(-.1cm,-.3cm)(-.1cm,0)}
-\rput[tr](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{labeldist} }
-
-% \timerwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist-\selfmesswidth-0.5\timerwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*4+.4cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\timerwidth,0)}
-%\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\selfmesswidth}
-\rput[r](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{timerwidth}}
-
-% \stopwidth
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+\instdist-0.5\stopwidth}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*4+0.5\stopwidth+.1cm}
-\rput(\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3,linestyle=dotted]{<->}(0,0)(\stopwidth,0)}
-\setlength{\lta}{\lta+\stopwidth}
-\rput[l](\lta,-\ltb){\printlength{stopwidth}}
-
-% \lostsymbolradius
-\setlength{\lta}{\envinstdist+2\instdist+\selfmesswidth+2\lostsymbolradius+0.1cm}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\topheaddist+\instheadheight+\firstlevelheight+\levelheight*4}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,.3cm)(0,0)}
-\setlength{\ltb}{\ltb+\lostsymbolradius}
-\rput[t](\lta,-\ltb){\psline[arrowscale=1.3]{->}(0,-.3cm)(0,0)}
-\rput[tl](\lta,-\ltb){ \printlength{lostsymbolradius}}
-
-\psset{linewidth=.8pt,dotsep=3pt}
-
-\declinst{m1}{aname}{iname}
-\declinst{st}{}{}
-\declinst{m2}{}{}
-
-\mess{msg1}{m1}{st}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{msg2}{m1}{st}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{self}{m1}{m1}
-\coregionstart{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\coregionend{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\lost[r]{x}{}{m2}
-\stop{st}
-\settimer{T}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\inlinestart{alt}{alt}{m1}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\inlineend{alt}
-\action{a}{m2}
-\nextlevel
-\referencestart{ref}{reference}{m1}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\referenceend{ref}
-\nextlevel
-\condition{cond1}{m1,m2}
-\nextlevel
-\nextlevel
-\mess{msg3}{m2}{m1}
-\end{msc}
-\end{center}
-
-
-\caption{User controllable parameters}
-\label{parametersfig}
-\end{figure}
-
-The value of a parameter can be changed using standard
-\LaTeX\ commands, e.g.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlength{\levelheight}{1cm}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The following list describes all parameters.
-The default values for drawing \MSC{}s at large, normal and small size are
-included. See the command \verb+\setmscvalues{size}+ below for
-restoring the parameters to their original values.
-
-%========================
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{actionheight}]
-Height of action symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{actionwidth}]
-Width of action symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.25}{1.25}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{bottomfootdist}]
-Distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.7}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{commentdist}]
-Distance between a comment and its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionheight}]
-Height of condition symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionoverlap}]
-Overlap of condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{envinstdist}]
-Distance between environments and nearest instance line.\\
-(\lnsvalue{2.5}{2.0}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{firstlevelheight}] Height of level just below head
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconnectionradius}]
-Radius of \HMSC{} connection symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.06}{0.05}{0.04} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferenceheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferencewidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbolwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} start symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineoverlap}]
-Overlap of inline symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instbarwidth}]
-Default width of vertical instance bars (applies to fat instances only).\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.0}{0.0}{0.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instdist}]
-Distance between instance axes.\\
-(\lnsvalue{3.0}{2.2}{1.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instfootheight}] Height of foot symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.25}{0.2}{0.15} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instheadheight}] Height of head symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.55}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instwidth}]
-Width of header and foot symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.75}{1.6}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{labeldist}]
-Distance between labels and the symbols to which they belong (for instance, message labels and arrows).\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} ex.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lastlevelheight}] Height of level just above foot
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{leftnamedist}] Distance between left of the frame and
-(left of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.1} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{levelheight}]
-Height of a level.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lostsymbolradius}]
-Radius of the lost and found symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.15}{0.12}{0.08} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{markdist}]
-Horizontal distance from a mark to its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuredist}]
-Horizontal distance from a measure to its (closest) instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuresymbolwidth}]
-Width of a measure symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferenceheight}]
-Height of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferencewidth}]
-Width of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{referenceoverlap}]
-Overlap of reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{regionbarwidth}]
-Width of region bars.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{selfmesswidth}]
-Length of horizontal arms of self messages.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{stopwidth}]
-Width of the stop symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{timerwidth}]
-Width of the \emph{timer} symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.4}{0.3}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topheaddist}]
-Distance between top of head symbols and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.3}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topnamedist}] Distance between top of the frame and
-(top of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\end{defs}
-
-In addition there are several commands which allow the user to adjust
-the \MSC{} drawing to his own taste.
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{messarrowscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale
-factor (a positive real number) of message arrow
-heads. (\lnsvalue{2}{1.5}{1.2})
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale factor
-of the \MSC{} environment to \emph{scalefactor}. the scale factor is
-supposed to be a real number. Scaling is done when the \MSC{}
-environment ends (\verb|\end{msc}|). The default of \emph{scalefactor}
-is~1. A more consistent way for
-varying the size of the \MSC{} can be obtained by using the
-\verb+\setmesvalues+ command as described below.
-(default value 1.)
-
-\item[\cmd{psset}\{\texttt{linewidth=D}\}] This command sets the width
-of all lines in \MSC{}s, \HMSC{}s, and \MSCdoc{}s to length \verb+D+. If
-this command is issued outside the msc environment, then the value is
-set for the complete document. If it is used directly after the start
-of the msc environment it only holds for this \MSC{}.\\
-(large/normal/small value 0.8/0.7/0.6 pt.)
-
-\item[\cmd{setfootcolor}\{\emph{color}\}] Sets the color of the foot
-symbols of \MSC{} instances. Possible values are \emph{black},
-\emph{white}, \emph{gray}, or \emph{lightgray}. For more color values,
-see the documentation of the \LaTeXe{} \textsf{color} package.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-The following command can be used to set the above mentioned
-style parameters to suitable values.
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\cmd{setmscvalues}\{\emph{size}\}] Sets all parameters of the \mscpack{} to
- predefined values. Valid values for \emph{size} are:
-\verb|small|, \verb|normal|, and \verb|large|.
-(The default value of \verb+size+ is \verb+normal+.
-This can be used for drawings with at maximum six instances on a
-sheet of A4 paper.
-For sizes \verb+large+ and \verb+small+, a maximum of four and nine
-instances respectively fit on a sheet of A4 paper.)
-\end{defs}
-
-Caution has to be taken when changing the value of a parameter within
-the \MSC{} definition. The following parameters can be changed within an
-\MSC{} definition without unexpected side effects:
-
-\begin{flushleft}
-\verb+\actionheight+,
-\verb+\actionwidth+,
-\verb+\bottomfootdist+,
-\verb+\conditionheight+,
-\verb+\conditionoverlap+,
-\verb+\inlineoverlap+,
-\verb+\instfootheight+,
-\verb+\instwidth+ (however, this may cause different sizes of
-corresponding instance header and footer symbols),
-\verb+\labeldist+,
-\verb+\lastlevelheight+,
-\verb+\levelheight+,
-\verb+\lostsymbolradius+,
-\verb+\referenceoverlap+,
-\verb+\regionbarwidth+,
-\verb+\selfmesswidth+,
-\verb+\stopwidth+,
-\verb+\timerwidth+, and
-\verb+\topnamedist+.
-\end{flushleft}
-
-
-In addition to the parameters specific to the \mscpack,
-standard \LaTeX\ commands can be used to change the type style and
-other details.
-For example, if the command \verb+\sffamily+ is included directly after
-the start of the msc environment, the text in the \MSC{}
-is drawn using a {\sf sans serif} font. Likewise, the text size can be
-changed by inserting, e.g., the command \verb+\small+.
-The \verb+\raisebox+ and \verb+\parbox+ commands
-can also be used to position and format names.
-
-
-\section{Example}
-\label{example}
-Figure~\ref{ex} on page~\pageref{ex} shows the \MSC{} defined in the
-following \LaTeX\ fragment.
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
-\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
-\dummyinst{m2}
-\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
-
-\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
-\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
-\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
-\order{m1}{m2}[4]
-\action{a}{m3}
-
-\nextlevel
-\found{msg x}{}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
-\coregionstart{m1}
-\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-
-\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
-\coregionstart{m2}
-\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
-\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
-\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m2}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m1}
-\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
-\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-
-\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
-\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stop{usr}
-
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-\begin{msc}{Example}
-\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
-\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
-\dummyinst{m2}
-\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
-
-\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
-\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
-\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
-\order{m1}{m2}[4]
-\action{a}{m3}
-
-\nextlevel
-\found{msg x}{}{usr}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
-\coregionstart{m1}
-\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-
-\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
-\coregionstart{m2}
-\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
-\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
-\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m2}
-\nextlevel
-
-\coregionend{m1}
-\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
-\nextlevel
-
-\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
-\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
-\nextlevel
-
-\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
-\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\stop{usr}
-
-\end{msc}
-
-\caption{A menagerie of \MSC{} symbols}
-\label{ex}
-\end{center}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\section{Acknowledgments}
-Thanks are due to the following people for providing us with useful
-input: Peter Peters, Michel Reniers.
-
-\bibliographystyle{plain}
-\bibliography{biblio}
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..da4db8cccba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..10b32f11a9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/msc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2299 @@
+% file: manual.tex
+% Copyright 2008-2013 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, P. Kordy, and S. Mauw
+% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
+%
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
+\def\pgfautoxrefs{1}
+\usepackage[version=latest]{pgf}
+\usepackage{xparse}
+% \usepackage{a4wide}
+% \usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{moreverb}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{msc}
+\usepackage{showexpl}
+\usepackage{xkeyval,calc,listings,tikz,fp}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{ifluatex}
+\usepackage[a4paper,left=2.25cm,right=2.25cm,top=2.5cm,bottom=2.5cm,nohead]{geometry}
+\usepackage{amsmath,amssymb}
+\usepackage{xxcolor}
+\usepackage{pifont}
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\usepackage{compsci}
+\usepackage{xstring}
+% \usepackage{pgfmanual}
+\newcommand{\PK}[1]{%
+{\color{red}{\bf[PK]} #1}}
+
+% we allow a ragged right
+\setlength{\rightskip}{0pt plus 0.05\linewidth minus 0pt}
+
+\input{manual-macros.tex}
+% \hypersetup{hidelinks}
+\hypersetup{%
+ colorlinks=true, % use true to enable colors below:
+ linkcolor=blue,%red,
+ filecolor=blue,%magenta,
+ urlcolor=blue,%cyan,
+ citecolor=blue,
+ pdfborder=0 0 0,
+}
+
+\makeindex
+\makeatletter
+\def\convertto#1#2{\strip@pt\dimexpr #2*65536/\number\dimexpr 1#1}%\dimexpr require etex
+\input{pgfmanual.code}
+\pgfkeys{
+ % list is tried to find a match.
+ /pdflinks/search key prefixes in={/msc/,/tikz/,/pgf/,/depgraph/},
+ %
+}
+\newcommand{\msckey}[3]{
+ \IfEndWith*{\mscget{#1}}{pt}{%
+ \IfStrEq*{#1}{label distance}{
+ \def\tmp{\convertto{ex}{\mscget{#1}}ex}
+ }{
+ \def\tmp{\convertto{cm}{\mscget{#1}}cm}
+ }
+ }{%
+ \edef\tmp{\mscget{#1}}
+ }
+
+ \begin{key}{/msc/#1=#2 (initially \tmp)}
+ #3
+ \end{key}
+}
+\newcommand{\mscstyle}[2]{
+ \begin{stylekey}{/msc/#1}
+ #2
+ \end{stylekey}
+}
+
+% The following code is taken from the doc package. It defines a global
+% macro \bslash that produces a bslash (if present in the current font).
+{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12 |gdef|bslash{\}}
+\makeatother
+\title{
+ A \LaTeX{} macro package for Message Sequence Charts\\{\large User Manual}
+}
+
+\author{
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+ Victor Bos & &
+ Ton van Deursen\\
+ & & \\
+ Piotr Kordy& &
+ Sjouke Mauw
+ \end{tabular}\\
+ \end{tabular}
+}
+
+\date{\small Version A\mscversion, last update \today\\
+ Describing \mscpack{} version \mscversion}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+\noindent
+The \mscpack{} facilitates the \LaTeX\ user to easily include
+Message Sequence Charts in his texts. This document describes the
+design and use of the \mscpack.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\tableofcontents
+\section{New}
+\label{new}
+\paragraph{Version~2.00} is the result of a complete rewrite of the package.
+The main difference is that the package is
+now implemented in \tikzname\ instead of \verb+PSTricks+, making it
+compatible with
+\verb+pdfLaTex+ and \beamer.
+
+In addition the syntax has been slightly extended. It now supports the
+specification of all options as a comma separated list in square
+brackets, while remaining backward compatible. All lengths are now
+stored using \pgfname\ keys. As a result it is possible to change
+sizes of shapes individually. Support for colors is added.
+
+We are much indebted to Adrian Farmadin (Masaryk University, Czech
+Republic) for initiating and contributing to this software rehaul.
+
+
+\paragraph{Version~1.17} slightly modifies the handling of the
+|offset| argument of the |\mess|, |\setstoptimer|, and
+|\settimeout| commands. All commands with an |offset|
+argument can now properly handle real numbers as
+argument. Furthermore, the \verb+\topheaddist+,
+\verb+\firstlevelheight+, and \verb+\instheadheight+ lengths are now
+taken into account when computing the height of the instance and the
+\verb+\gatesymbolradius+ length is now properly implemented.
+
+The |\condition*| macro is now extended to dynamically
+resize a condition symbol that spans multiple instances. The
+|\condition*| and |\action*| macros, introduced in the
+previous release, no longer shrink to a size smaller than their
+non-starred counterparts. The |\condition| and
+|\action| have crossed-out counterparts |\ncondition| and
+|\naction| respectively.
+
+A variation to the \verb+\stop+ command is implemented. Rather than
+drawing a cross to denote that an instance has stopped, the
+\verb+\stop*+ command draws an instance footer.
+
+Finally, the \verb+\create+ command no longer requires the
+\verb+creator+ parameter to be specified. If it is not specified, no
+arrow is drawn from the creator to the dynamically created instance.
+
+
+\paragraph{Version~1.16} solves a bug that was due to a change in
+syntax of the \verb+scalebox+ macro in the \verb+PSTricks+ package.
+
+The |\action| and |\condition| macros are extended with a
+starred option. The starred version of the macros automatically
+adjusts the size of the rectangle and hexagon based on the size of the
+contents.
+
+\paragraph{Version~1.13} has a reimplementation of message commands in MSC
+diagrams. The affected commands are: |\create|, |\found|,
+|\lost|, |\mess|, and |\order|. The new implementation
+provides more control over the placement of message labels.
+
+The command \verb+\selfmesslabelpos+ has been removed.
+
+The bounding box bug has been partly solved. Now, a white |\fbox|
+is drawn around every (msc, mscdoc, hmsc) diagram. This makes it
+possible for \texttt{dvips -E} to compute the correct bounding box for
+the diagrams. Due to the |\fbox|, each diagram is extended with
+0.3pt on each side (left, top, right, and bottom). This bugfix fails
+if the background is not white. The xdvi program shows the white
+|\fbox| in black with the result that diagrams have two visible
+frames. This seems to be a bug of xdvi.
+
+The lines around comments (|\msccomment|, Section~\ref{comments})
+are changed from gray into black. The reason for this is that the gray
+lines became invisible after converting the document to HTML.
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\label{introduction}
+
+The \MSC{} language is a visual language for the description of the
+interaction between different components of a system.
+This language is standardized by the ITU (International
+Telecommunication Union) in Recommendation Z.120~\cite{z120}. An
+introductory text on \MSC{} can be found
+in~\cite{RudolphGrabowskiGraubmann96}. \MSC{}s have a
+wide application domain, ranging from requirements specification to
+testing and documentation.
+An example of a Message Sequence Chart is in Figure~\ref{quick}.
+
+In order to support easy drawing of \MSC{}s in \LaTeX\ documents, we have
+developed the \mscpack. The current version of the \mscpack{}
+supports the following \MSC{} constructs: \MSC{} frame, instances (both
+single line width and double line width), messages (including
+self-messages and messages to the environment), actions, singular and
+combined timer events (set, timeout, reset, set-timeout, set-stop),
+lost and found messages, generalized order, conditions, coregions,
+activation regions, suspension regions, gates, instance creation,
+instance stop, time measurements, references, and inline
+expressions. In addition, there is support for \HMSC{}'s (high-level
+\MSC{}s) and \MSCdoc{}s.
+
+In this manual we explain the design and the use of the \mscpack. For
+a complete overview of all features, we refer to the reference
+manual~\cite{BM02}, which is included in the distribution under the
+name \verb+refman.ps+. Another way to learn how to use the \mscpack{}
+is to have a look at the \LaTeX{} source code of the manual and the
+source code of the reference manual. They are included in the
+distribution under the names \verb+manual.tex+ and \verb+refman.tex+,
+respectively. The \MSC{} constructs are simply introduced as
+syntactic constructs. This paper is not meant to describe their use or
+meaning.
+
+We list the backgrounds of the package and some design decisions in
+Section~\ref{background}.
+Section~\ref{install} contains notes on installing the
+package. Section~\ref{quickstart} contains an example of using the
+package. It allows the impatient reader to quickly start using the
+package. The details of using the package are explained in
+Section~\ref{use}. In Section~\ref{parameters} the parameters are
+explained which determine detailed layout of the various symbols.
+A large but meaningless example is given in
+Section~\ref{example}.
+
+
+\section{Background and motivation}
+\label{background}
+Several commercial and non-commercial tools are available, which
+support drawing or generating Message Sequence Charts. However, these
+tools are in general not freely available and often not flexible
+enough to satisfy all user's wishes with respect to the layout and
+graphical appearance of an \MSC{}.
+Therefore, people often use general drawing tools, such as {\em xfig}
+to draw \MSC{}s. However flexible this approach is, it takes quite some
+effort to produce nice \MSC{} drawings in a tool which is not dedicated
+to \MSC{}s. Furthermore, when drawing a number of \MSC{}s it requires some
+preciseness in order to obtain a consistent set of \MSC{}s.
+
+For these reasons, we have started the design of a set of
+\LaTeX\ macros which support the drawing of \MSC{}s. In this way, an \MSC{} can be
+represented in \LaTeX\ in a textual format and compiled into
+e.g.\ PostScript.
+
+We aimed at satisfying the following requirements and design
+decisions.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+The package should follow the ITU standard with respect to shape and
+placement of the symbols. (The current version supports
+the \MSC2000 standard.)
+\item
+Static and dynamic semantics are not considered. The user is allowed
+to violate all semantical restrictions and draw inconsistent \MSC{}s.
+The package only supports elementary syntactical requirements.
+\item
+The package should offer functionality at the right level of
+abstraction. Rather than supplying coordinates of pixels, the
+user should be able to express the placement of symbols in terms of
+{\em levels}.
+Nevertheless, the textual representation of \MSC{}s as defined by the ITU
+standard has a level of abstraction which is too high for our purposes.
+It lacks information about the actual positioning of the \MSC{} symbols,
+while we think that in our package this should be under user control.
+\item
+There should be only minimal automatic restructuring and layout of the
+\MSC{} (e.g.\ the relative positioning of two messages should be as
+defined by the user, even if the messages are not causally ordered).
+\item
+The user can customize the appearance of the \MSC{}s by manipulating
+an appropriate set of parameters.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Installation, copyright and system requirements}
+\label{install}
+
+The \mscpack{} is still under development. The authors
+appreciate any comments and suggestions for improvements. The most
+recent version of the package can be downloaded from
+\url{http://satoss.uni.lu/mscpackage/}.
+
+
+The \mscpack{} has a \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}
+(LPPL), see~\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}:
+{\small
+\verbatiminput{COPYRIGHT}
+} As such, it is free of charge and can be freely
+distributed. Furthermore, it is allowed to make modifications to the
+package, provided that modified versions get different names. The
+authors accept no liability with respect to the functioning of the
+package.
+
+The \mscpack{} runs with \LaTeXe. It has been tested with \LaTeXe\
+version dated 1998/06/01 using \TeX\ version 3.14159. The following
+additional packages are required: \textsf{tikz}, \textsf{calc},
+and \textsf{xstring}. These packages are in general
+part of the standard \LaTeXe\ distribution. These additional packages
+can be obtained from the {\em ctan} database for \LaTeX\, e.g.\ via
+the following URL: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}. The \textsf{tikz}
+package is described shortly in~\cite{mertz2007graphics} or in the \pgfname
+manual~\cite{tantau2022pgf}.
+The generated output can be previewed with pdf/ps previewing software.
+It may be needed to update all \LaTeX\ related software
+to a more recent version in order to smoothly work with the \mscpack.
+
+The \mscpack{} can be installed easily. Just put the file
+|msc.sty| in a directory which is searched by \LaTeX{} for style
+files. The set of directories actually searched depends on the \TeX\
+installation, but often the {\em current directory} is included. UNIX
+users may have to set the environment variable \texttt{\$TEXINPUTS} to
+an appropriate value. For more details on this topic consult
+documentation of your \TeX\ installation.
+
+%The following text is currently not applicable -sm
+%
+%A problem may occur when using more packages than the \MSC{} macro
+%package in your \LaTeX\ document. This happens, e.g.\ when using the
+%{\em epsfig} package. These problems are due to the combination of
+%several packages which are required (but not provided) by the \MSC{}
+%macro package. The solution is to change the order of the
+%\verb+usepackage+ clauses.
+
+\section{Quick start}
+\label{quickstart}
+The \mscpack{} is easy to use.
+Below is an example of the use of the package and
+Figure~\ref{quick} shows the generated \MSC{}.
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-6.8cm]
+\begin{msc}{Example}
+\declinst{usr}{User}{}
+\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}
+\declinst{m2}{Machine 2}{drill}
+
+\mess[label position=below]
+{startm1}{usr}{m1}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{startm2}{m1}{m2}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{log}{m1}{envleft}
+\nextlevel
+\nextlevel
+\mess{output}{m2}{usr}[2]
+\mess{free}{m1}{usr}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+\end{center}
+\caption{The generated \MSC{}}
+\label{quick}
+\end{figure}
+The \mscpack{} is activated by the clause \verb+\usepackage{msc}+. This package
+contains, among others, a definition of the environment |msc|. This
+environment is used to draw \MSC{}s. The \MSC{} definition is surrounded by the
+clauses |\begin{msc}{Example}| and |\end{msc}|. The name of the
+\MSC{}, {\tt Example}, is displayed in the upper-left corner of the \MSC{}.
+
+The next four lines define the \emph{instances}:
+|\declinst{m1}{Machine 1}{control}| defines an instance with
+\meta{nickname} |m1| and a description consisting of two parts,
+namely, |Machine 1| and |control|. The nickname is used in
+all subsequent references to this instance. The first part of the
+description is drawn above the rectangular instance head symbol, and
+the second part of the description is drawn inside the instance head
+symbol.
+
+The following lines contain the definitions of the messages. Every
+message has a source and a destination instance. The clause
+|\mess[label position=below]{startm1}{usr}{m1}| defines a message with name
+|startm1|, which goes from instance |usr| to instance |m1|.
+Between square brackets we can put optional list of options. Each option is
+comma separated from another option. In this example we specify the placement of
+the label to be below the message arrow.
+
+In order to control the vertical placement of the messages, the \MSC{} is
+divided into levels. At every level, any number of messages may start.
+The vertical position of the end point of a message is determined
+by the optional fourth argument of the message definition, as in the
+clause |\mess{output}{m2}{user}[2]|.
+This argument is the vertical offset (in number of levels) between the
+start point of the message (i.e.,\ the current level) and its end point.
+If the value is 0 the message is drawn horizontally. A negative offset
+means that the arrow has an upward slope. Equivalently we could specify this
+value using option: |\mess[level shift=2]{output}{m2}{user}|.
+
+The clause |\nextlevel| is used to advance to the next level.
+
+\section{Use of the \mscpack}
+\label{use}
+\subsection{Options}
+Each command supported by the \mscpack\ can be provided with a list of
+options. A list of
+options is surrounded by square brackets and options are separated
+by a comma. In fact options are \pgfname\ keys and the parsing of options
+is done internally by the \tikzname\ package. All keys defined by the
+\mscpack\ are
+prefixed by the |/msc| keyword. When a key is not fully specified (i.e.,\ it is
+specified without the |/msc|, |/tikz| or some other prefix) the
+package will search first for the keys in the |/msc| namespace and if no
+key is found it will search the default |/tikz| name space.
+
+In the description below, optional arguments are marked in \opt{green}.
+\subsection{The \MSC{} frame}
+\label{mscframe}
+The |msc| environment is used for making \MSC{} definitions. Thus, such a
+definition looks as follows.
+\begin{environment}{{msc}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{msc name}}
+This declares the |msc| environment. The frame and the header of the
+\MSC{} are drawn.
+The argument \meta{msc name} is the name of the \MSC{}.
+The header of an \MSC{} is formed from the keyword |msc|, followed
+by the \meta{msc name}.
+
+The size of the \MSC{} frame is determined vertically by the number of levels
+occurring in the \MSC{} (see Section~\ref{levels}) and horizontally by
+the number of instances (see Section~\ref{instances}).
+\msckey{title position}{\meta{position}}{
+ Controls the position of the header of the MSC. Possible values of
+ \meta{position} are:
+ |left|, |right|, and |center|.}
+\msckey{msc keyword}{\meta{keyword}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{keyword} in the header.}
+\msckey{title distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between left/right side of the frame and the MSC
+ header.}
+\msckey{title top distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between top of the frame and the (top
+ of the) MSC header.}
+\msckey{left environment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the left-most instance and the
+ left side of the frame.
+}
+\msckey{right environment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the right-most instance and
+ the right side of the frame.
+}
+ \begin{key}{/msc/environment distance}
+ Sets the keys |right environment distance| and |left environment distance| to
+ the provided value.
+ \end{key}
+\msckey{instance distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Sets the \meta{distance} between the (vertical) instance lines.
+}
+
+\begin{key}{/msc/draw frame=\meta{colour} (default , initially \mscget{draw frame})}
+ Sets the colour of the frame. If you do not want to draw a frame, set
+ \meta{colour} to |none|. When \meta{colour} is empty, then the last colour is used,
+ usually black.
+\end{key}
+
+\begin{key}{/msc/draw grid=\meta{grid type} (default grid, initially \mscget{draw grid})}
+ Specifies if we want to draw the help grid in msc. Possible values for
+ \meta{grid type} are |grid|,
+ |color grid| and |none|.
+\end{key}
+
+\end{environment}
+
+\subsection{Levels}
+\label{levels}
+An \MSC{} is vertically divided in {\em levels}. All events in an \MSC{} are
+attached to a certain level, or stretch out over several levels.
+Any number of events can be drawn at a certain level.
+An event will always be drawn (or started) at the current level, unless a level
+offset is specified (see e.g.\ the |\mess| command in
+Section~\ref{messages}). The \meta{level offset} is a positive integer number, which
+denotes at which level, relative to the current level, an event should
+be drawn.
+Drawing starts at level 0.
+The following command is used to advance to the next level.
+\begin{command}{\nextlevel\opt{\oarg{level offset}}}
+The \meta{lever offset} is a positive integer value which denotes the number of
+levels to advance. By default, the value of \meta{lever offset} is 1, which means
+drawing continues at the next level.
+\end{command}
+The following keys influence the |\nextlevel| command:
+\msckey{first level height}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the instance start symbol and the first level.}
+\msckey{level height}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between two consecutive levels.}
+\msckey{last level height}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the last level and the instance end symbol.}
+
+Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on page~\pageref{parametersfig} shows all lengths of
+the \mscpack.
+\subsection{Instances}
+\label{instances}
+All instances have to be declared before they can be used. An instance
+consists of an instance head symbol with an associated name, an
+instance axis and an instance end symbol. Normal instances have a
+single line axis. Fat instances have a double line axis. The order of
+the instance declarations determines the order in which the instances
+occur in the drawing.
+
+An instance is declared with the following command.
+
+\begin{command}{\declinst\opt{*}\marg{nickname}\marg{instance name above}\marg{instance name within}}
+The starred version produces a fat instance.
+The \meta{nickname} is used for referring to this instance in the rest of the
+MSC definition.
+The \meta{instance name above} is put above the instance head symbol.
+The \meta{instance name within} is put inside the instance head symbol.
+\MSC{} definition.
+\end{command}
+The keys associated with the command:
+\msckey{head height}{\meta{height}} {
+ Specifes the minimum \meta{height} of the instance head symbol.}
+\msckey{instance width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Specifes the minimum \meta{width} of the instance head symbol.}
+\msckey{head top distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifes the \meta{distance} between top of the head symbols and frame.}
+\msckey{foot height}{\meta{height}}{
+ Specifes the \meta{height} of the instance foot symbol.}
+\msckey{foot distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifes the \meta{distance} between the instance foot symbol and the bottom of the \MSC{} frame.}
+\msckey{environment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the edge of the \MSC{} and the first/last instance axis.}
+\msckey{instance width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{width} of the instance head and foot symbols.}
+\msckey{label distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the instance head symbol and the part of the
+ instance name drawn above the head symbol.}
+\msckey{draw head}{\meta{colour}}{
+ Sets the colour of the instance head. If you do not want to draw an instance head, set
+ \meta{colour} to |none|. When \meta{colour} is empty, then the last colour is used,
+ usually black.
+}
+
+% The command \verb+\setfootcolor{color}+ sets the
+% fill color of the footer symbol. Valid color values are, e.g.,
+% \texttt{black} (default), \texttt{white}, and \texttt{gray}.
+The following \MSC{} shows the declaration of an \MSC{} with three
+instances. The first and the last are normal instances (one line axis),
+whereas the second is a fat instance (double line axis). The optional
+parameter |values small|, indicates that the small drawing
+style should be used (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
+% \setmscvalues{small}
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-8.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{instances}
+\declinst{i}{above}{within}
+\declinst*{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{k}{}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Messages}
+\label{messages}
+A message is denoted by an arrow from the sending instance to the
+receiving instance. The instances are referred to by their nicknames.
+A message is defined with the following command.
+\begin{command}{\mess\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{sender}\marg{receiver}\opt{\oarg{leveloffset}}}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \mess(*)[pos]{name}[labelpos]{sender}[placement]{receiver}[leveloffset]
+% \end{verbatim}
+The \meta{name} of the message may be any string. The \mscpack{}
+processes the \meta{name} argument in LR-mode,
+see~\cite[page~36]{Lam94}. This means that the string will consist of
+one line. To generate multi-line message names, use the standard
+\cmd{parbox} command, see the \emph{Tricks} section in the reference
+manual~\cite{BM02}. By default, the name of a message label is drawn
+above the center of the arrow, but the optional keys |label position|,
+|side|, and |pos| influence the actual location,
+as described below. The arrow starts at the current level at the
+sending instance. The arrow ends at the current level plus the
+level \meta{leveloffset}, at the receiving instance. \meta{leveloffset} can be
+also modified by specifying keys |level shift| and |offset|. The
+\meta{sender} and \meta{receiver} should be the nicknames of declared
+instances.
+Messages to or from the environment (i.e.,\ the left or the right side
+of the \MSC{} frame) can be
+specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to one of the values
+|envleft| or |envright|. (Note: Since instances and
+environments are treated equally in the implementation, at every position
+where the nickname of an instance is required, also
+|envleft| and |envright| are allowed.)
+
+In case the sending and the receiving instance are the same, the
+message is a \emph{self message}. A self message is drawn as a
+polyline connecting the instance axis to itself.
+
+The starred version of the command, |\mess*|, produces the same
+result as |\mess|, except that the arrow is drawn with a dashed
+line. This can be used to draw a {\em method reply} (see~\cite{z120}).
+\end{command}
+The following keys influence the messages:
+\msckey{level shift}{\meta{integer}}{
+ For non-self message, \meta{integer} determines at which level message should arrive relative to the starting level
+ of the message.
+}
+\msckey{offset}{\meta{integer}}{
+ For self message, \meta{integer} determines how many levels the message arrow should advance.
+}
+\msckey{side}{\meta{side}}{
+ Determine the position of the arrow with respect to the instance axis. Valid values
+ for \meta{side} are |left| and |right|. In case of a non-self message the key is ignored.
+}
+\msckey{label position}{\meta{position}}{
+ Determines the position of the label.In case of non-self message, valid values
+ for \meta{position} are |above|, |below|, |above~left|, |above~right|,
+ |below~left| and |below~right|. In case of self message valid values are |left|
+ and |right| and the default value is taken from the value of the key |side|. As
+ the implementation uses corresponding |/tikz| keys the |label~position=| part
+ can be skipped.
+}
+\msckey{pos}{\meta{real}}{
+ Determines the relative distance of the message label to the beginning of the
+ message. Valid values for \meta{real} are real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$.
+ The key works in similar way as |/tikz/pos| key.
+}
+\msckey{self message width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Controls the \meta{width} of the polyline used for drawing self-message.
+% It also affects other commands such as |\order|, |\settimeout| or |\setstoptimer|.
+}
+\msckey{label distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} between the label of a message and the message arrow.
+}
+\msckey{arrow scale}{\meta{scale}}{
+ The \meta{scale} specifies by which factor should the message arrow be scaled. Influences all
+ arrows drawn in |msc| environment.
+}
+
+In Figure~\ref{fig:mscsomeExample} we see \MSC{} that shows an example of the use of messages.
+In this sample \MSC{} and the following \MSC{}s in this section we will
+not list the complete textual representations of the \MSC{}s. For brevity
+we omit the environment call and the declarations of the instances.
+Note the final |\nextlevel| command which is needed
+to make the instance axis long enough to receive message
+\verb+a+.
+
+Figure~\ref{fig:refpoints:B} shows different options that can be used to
+position label. We use the keys |pos|, |label position| and |side| to place
+the labels. Additionally we use |/tikz/anchor| key, which is an alternative way
+to specify the placement of the label (see PGF Manual~\cite{tantau2022pgf}).
+
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values,head top distance=0.8cm]{messages}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\mess{a}{j}{i}[3]
+\mess{self}{i}{i}[1]
+\nextlevel
+\mess*{b}{j}{k}
+\mess[b]{c}{k}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{d}{k}[.6]{i}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+\caption{Example showing msc messages}
+\label{fig:mscsomeExample}
+\end{figure}
+%
+\begin{figure}[htbp]
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{Label reference points}
+\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
+\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
+\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess[label position=above]{above}{m0}{m1}
+\nextlevel
+\mess[label position=below]{below}{m1}{m2}
+\nextlevel[2]
+
+\mess[anchor=south,pos=0.1]{south}{m1}{m0}
+\nextlevel
+\mess[anchor=north]{north}{m2}{m1}
+\nextlevel[2]
+
+\mess[label position=left]{left}{m0}{m0}[2]
+\mess[side=right,pos=0.9]{right}{m2}{m2}[2]
+\nextlevel[4]
+\mess[label position=right]{right}{m0}{m0}[2]
+\mess[left,side=right]{left}{m2}{m2}[2]
+\nextlevel[6]
+
+\mess[anchor=east]{east}{m0}{m0}[-2]
+\mess[anchor=west,side=right]{west}{m2}{m2}[-2]
+\nextlevel[4]
+\mess[right]{right}{m0}{m0}[-2]
+\mess[side=right,left]{left}{m2}{m2}[-2]
+\nextlevel[2]
+
+\mess[below left]{below left}{m0}{m1}[2]
+\mess[above right]{above right}{m1}{m2}[2]
+\nextlevel[6]
+
+\mess[anchor=south west]{SW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
+\mess[anchor=north east,pos=0]{NE}{m2}{m1}[-2]
+\nextlevel[2]
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+\caption{Different placing the message labels}
+\label{fig:refpoints:B}
+\end{figure}
+
+\subsection{Comments}
+\label{comments}
+
+Comments are additional texts to clarify (events on) an instance. The
+following command can be used to add comments to an \MSC{} diagram.
+\begin{command}{\msccomment\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{text}\marg{instance}}
+
+The \meta{instance} parameter defines the instance to which the
+comment is attached. The text of the comment is specified by the
+\meta{text} parameter and is processed in LR-mode.
+The key |side| affect the horizontal position relative to its instance.
+\end{command}
+The following key affects the drawing of the comment:
+\msckey{msccomment distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{distance} at which the comment will be placed from the
+ \meta{instance} instance.
+}
+
+The following diagram shows how to use comments. In this diagram we modify the
+distance between the frame and the instances in order to fit the comments inside
+the frame.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-8.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values,
+ left environment distance=2.6cm,
+ right environment distance=1.9cm]{comments}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\mess{a}{i}{j}[2]
+\msccomment[msccomment distance=1.2cm]{start}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\msccomment[side=right]{end}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Actions}
+\label{actions}
+An instance can perform an action, which is denoted by a
+rectangle. There are two commands to draw actions:
+\begin{command}{\action\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+The action is attached at the current level to the \meta{instance}.
+The \meta{name} is centered inside the action symbol and is processed
+in LR-mode. The height and width of the action symbol are adjusted so that
+the \meta{name} fits inside a rectangle.
+
+The starred version of the command, |\action*|, produces the same
+result as |\action|, except that the width of the action is not adjusted.
+
+The following keys determine the detailed drawing of the action
+symbol:
+\msckey{action width}{\meta{width}}{Specifies the \meta{width} of the action symbol.}
+\msckey{action height}{\meta{hegiht}}{Specifies the \meta{height} of the action symbol.}
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\naction\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+The |\naction| command produces an action box with a diagonal
+cross in it. It is otherwise identical to the |\action| command.
+\end{command}
+
+
+The following example shows that after an action often a multiple level
+increment is needed to obtain nice pictures.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-8.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values, instance distance=1.6cm]{action}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\mess{a}{j}{i}
+\nextlevel
+\naction{doit}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\action*{doitnow}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\mess{b}{i}{j}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Timers}
+\label{timers}
+There are five commands to draw timer events.
+\begin{command}{\settimer\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}%
+Setting of a timer is drawn as a line connecting the \meta{instance}
+to the {\em hour glass} symbol. The \meta{name} is put near this
+symbol. The key |side| is determines on which side of the instance axis the
+timer is drawn. The key |self message width| determines the lenght of the arm
+between the symbol and the instance axis. The key |label distance| determines
+the distance between the name and the timer symbol. The key |arrow scale|
+determines the scaling of the arrow.
+{\em hour glass} symbol to the \meta{instance}.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\timeout\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+A time-out is represented by an arrow from an
+{\em hour glass} symbol to the \meta{instance}.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\stoptimer\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}}
+Stopping a timer is drawn as a line connecting the \meta{instance} with the timer stop
+symbol (denoted by a cross).
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\settimeout\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\opt{\oarg{offset}}}
+The command |\settimeout| is a combination of the setting of a
+timer and a time out. The \meta{offset} denotes the number of levels
+between the two events.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\setstoptimer\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\opt{\oarg{offset}}}
+Likewise, |\setstoptimer| is a combination
+of the setting of a timer and stopping a timer.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{offset}{\meta{offset}}{
+ The key holds the value of \meta{offset}. It denotes the number of levels
+ between the two events.
+}%
+\msckey{timer width}{\meta{width}}{
+ The key determines the \meta{width} of the hour glass and the time out symbols.
+}
+
+The various timer symbols are shown in the following example.
+
+\medskip
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{timers}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\settimer{T,50}{j}
+\setstoptimer[r]{V}{k}[6]
+\nextlevel[2]
+\timeout{T}{j}
+\settimeout{U}{i}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\settimer[r]{T,20}{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stoptimer[r]{T}{j}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Time measurements}
+\label{measurements}
+There are several commands to add time measurements to an \MSC{}.
+\begin{command}{
+\mscmark\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}
+}
+This command attach an absolute time stamp to an event on an \meta{instance}.
+The \meta{name} is the text attached to the mark symbol, which is a dashed
+polyline. The position of the mark is determined by the keys |position| (above,
+below) and |side| (left,right).
+\end{command}
+\msckey{position}{\meta{position}}{
+ The key determines the position of the mark symbol relative to the marked
+ event. The allowed values for \meta{position} are |above|, |mid| and |below|.
+}
+\begin{command}{\measure\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance1}\marg{instance2}\opt{\oarg{offset}}}
+ This command connects two events from \meta{instance1} and \meta{instance2}.
+ The first event is at the current level. The second event is \meta{offset}
+ levels lower than the first event. Not that instead giving optional argument
+ \meta{offset} we can specify the key |offset|. The \meta{name} is attached to
+ the measure symbol. The measure symbol can be placed ath the left or right of
+ \meta{instance1}. This is determined by the value of the key |side|. In the
+ starred version of the command arrow heads are at the outside of the measured
+ interval.
+\end{command}
+In case the two events are far apart, the measure may be split in two
+parts. We use two commands to draw this parts:
+\begin{command}{\measurestart\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\marg{gate}}
+ Draws the first part of the measure. The points where these two parts should
+ be connected are drawn by a small cicle, to which the text \meta{gate} in
+ attached.
+ In the starred version of the command arrow heads are at the outside of the
+ measured interval.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\measureend\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{instance}\marg{gate}}
+ Draws the first part of the measure in similar way as |\measurestart| command.
+\end{command}
+
+
+Several keys can be used to control the detailed layout of the time measurement
+symbols. The |label distance| key specify the distance between the label of a
+measurement and the measurement symbol.
+\msckey{measure distance}{\meta{distance}}{
+This key specifies at which \meta{distance} the measurement symbols are drawn from the
+\meta{instance} line.
+}
+\msckey{measure symbol width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Specifies the \meta{width} of the measurement triangle symbol.
+}
+
+The following example illustrates marks and measurements in an \MSC{}..
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{Time measurements}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\mess{m1}{i}{j}[1]
+\mscmark{t=0.0}{i}
+\measure{0.6}{i}{j}[4]
+\nextlevel
+\mscmark[position=above,side=right]{t=0.3}{j}
+\nextlevel[3]
+\mess{m2}{j}{k}
+\measurestart*[side=right]{0.2}{k}{g}
+\nextlevel[6]
+\mess{m3}{k}{i}
+\mscmark[position=below,side=left]{t=1.0}{i}
+\measureend*[side=right]{0.2}{k}{g}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Lost and found messages}
+\label{lostfound}
+\begin{command}{\lost\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{gate}\marg{instance}}
+A lost message is denoted by an arrow starting at an instance and
+ending at a filled circle.
+The argument \meta{instance} determines the instance to which the
+arrow is attached. The \meta{name} of the message is put above the
+message arrow. The \meta{gate} is a text associated to the circle.
+The keys |side|, |label position|, |pos|, |label distance| and
+|self message width|
+function in similar way as in the |\mess| command
+(Section~\ref{messages}). That is, |side| controls the placement of the lost or
+found message with respect to the instance axis. The |label position| and |pos|
+controls the placement of the \meta{name} with respect to the message arrow.
+The key |self message width| determines the length of the arrow and |label
+distance| specifies the distance between the name and the arrow.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\found\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{gate}\marg{instance}}
+A found message is denoted by an arrow starting at an open circle and ending at
+an instance. Otherwise the command is identical to the |\lost| command.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{lost symbol radius}{\meta{radius}}{
+ Determines the \meta{radius} of the circle for lost and found messages.
+}
+
+The following example shows a found and a lost message.
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.8cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{lost and found}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\found{m}{g}{i}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{p}{i}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\lost[side=right]{n}{}{j}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+
+\subsection{Conditions}
+\label{conditions}
+There are two commands to draw condition boxes:
+\begin{command}{\condition\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{text}\marg{instance list}}
+ A condition is denoted by a hexagon. It is used to express that the
+ system has entered a certain state. A condition relates to a number of
+ instances. All conditions which take part in the condition are covered
+ by the condition symbol. The other instances are drawn through the
+ condition symbol.
+
+ The \meta{text} is placed in the center of the condition. The
+ \meta{instance list} expresses which instances take part in the
+ condition. It is a list of nicknames of instances, separated by
+ commas. Take care not to add extra white space around the nicknames,
+ since this is considered part of the nickname in \LaTeX.
+ The order in which the instances are listed is immaterial.
+
+ The starred version of the command |\condition*|, produces the same
+ result as the command |\condition|, except that the width of the
+ condition symbol is not adjusted to fit the contents of the hexagon.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\ncondition\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{text}\marg{instance list}}
+The |\ncondition| command produces a condition with a diagonal
+cross in it. It is otherwise identical to the |\condition| command.
+\end{command}
+
+There are several keys that controls the shape of the condition
+symbol:
+\msckey{condition height}{\meta{hegiht}}{
+ Determines the \meta{height} of the condition symbol.
+}
+\msckey{condition overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ The \meta{distance} determines the width of the part of the condition
+ symbol which extends over the rightmost/leftmost contained instance
+ axis.
+}
+
+The following example contains some conditions.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-10.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{conditions}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\condition{some condition}{i,k}
+\nextlevel[3]
+\mess{m}{i}{j}
+\action{a}{k}
+\nextlevel
+\condition{C}{i}
+\ncondition{D}{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\condition{A, B, C}{i,j,k}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Generalized ordering}
+\label{ordering}
+A generalized order is treated much like a regular message (see
+Section~\ref{messages}). There
+are three differences: a generalized order is drawn with a
+dotted line, it has no label, and the arrow head is in the middle of
+the line. A generalized order is defined with the following command.
+\begin{command}{\order\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{sender}\marg{receiver}\opt{\oarg{level offset}}}
+The \meta{sender} and \meta{receiver} are the nicknames of the
+instances which are connected by the generalized ordering symbol.
+At the \meta{receiver} instance, the generalized ordering symbol ends
+at the current level plus the \meta{level offset}. The
+\meta{level offset} is an optional integer value, with default 0.
+
+In case \meta{sender} and \meta{receiver} denote the same instance,
+the order is a \emph{self order}. The placement of the order arrow of
+a self order is controlled by the key |side|. It
+can have values |left| (meaning that the ordering symbol is drawn
+left of the instance axis) and |right| (meaning that the ordering
+symbol is drawn right of the instance axis). By default it is drawn at
+the left side of the instance.
+
+The position of the arrow is controlled with the |pos| key. The key |self
+message width| specify the width of the polyline used for drawing orderings on a
+single instance axis. The key |arrow scale| controls the size of the arrow.
+
+Orderings to or from the environment (i.e.,\ the left or the right side
+of the \MSC{} frame) can be
+specified by setting the sender or the receiver argument to the value
+|envleft| or |envright|.
+\end{command}
+
+An example of a generalized order is given in the following diagram.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[head top distance=0.8cm]
+ {generalized order}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\mess{m}{envleft}{i}
+\order{i}{j}[1]
+\nextlevel
+\mess{k}{j}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Instance regions}
+\label{regions}
+A part of the instance axis can be drawn in a different style. Such a
+part is called an {\em instance region}. The following
+regions are supported:
+{\em coregion} (the instance axis is dashed, which means that the order of the
+attached instances is immaterial),
+{\em suspension region} (a small rectangle with dashed left and right
+sides, which denotes that the instance is suspended),
+{\em activation region} (a small filled rectangle, which denotes that
+the instance has control).
+
+The following commands are used to draw an instance region.
+\begin{command}{\regionstart\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{type}\marg{instance name}}
+ After this command the instance axis of \meta{intstance name} is drawn in the
+ shape determined by \meta{type} starting from the current level.
+ The \meta{type} can have values |coregion|, |suspension|, and |activation|.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\regionend\marg{instance name}}
+ After this command the instance axis for the \meta{instance name} is drawn in
+ the usual way. In other words it ends current region.
+\end{command}
+The following keys control the shape of on instance region:
+\msckey{region width}{
+ Determines the \meta{width} of the coregion start and end symbol and the \meta{width} of the activation and suspension rectangle.
+}
+
+In the following example, several instance regions are demonstrated.
+Note that the relative order of |\mess|, |\regionstart|, and
+|\regionend| commands does not matter. Also notice that the
+second activation region on~$i$ ends with a method reply
+(which is produced by the command |\mess*|).
+
+\medskip
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{regions}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\regionstart{activation}{i} \nextlevel[3]
+\regionend{i}
+\mess{m}{i}{j} \nextlevel
+\regionstart{coregion}{j} \nextlevel
+\regionstart{suspension}{k}
+\mess{p}{j}{k} \nextlevel
+\regionstart{activation}{i}
+\mess{q}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\regionend{j} \nextlevel[3]
+\regionend{i}
+\mess*{r}{i}{j} \nextlevel
+\mess{s}{j}{k}
+\regionend{k} \nextlevel
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Instance creation and instance stop}
+\label{createstop}
+The \MSC{} language offers constructs for dynamic instance creation and
+instance destruction.
+An instance can dynamically create another instance by issuing a
+create command. An instance creation is drawn as a dashed message
+arrow. At the side of the arrow head, the instance head symbol for the
+created instance is drawn.
+An instance end symbol does not denote the end of the specified
+process, but merely the end of its current description. Therefore, a
+different symbol is needed which denotes that an instance stops before
+the end of the \MSC{} in which it is contained.
+The instance stop symbol is a cross.
+
+The following commands are used for instance creation and instance
+stop.
+\begin{command}{\dummyinst\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{created instance}}
+ This command reserve space for on instance which will be created dynamically.
+ |\dummyinst| command is mixed with the declarations of normal instances (see
+ the |\declinst| command, Section~\ref{instances}). The argument \meta{created
+ instance} is the nickname of the instance that will be created later.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\startinst\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{instance name}%
+ \marg{text above}\marg{text inside}}
+ This command create an instance. The created instance must have been declared
+ first with the |\dummyinst| command. The name of the created instance consists
+ of two parts. The part called \meta{text above} is placed above the instance
+ head and the \meta{text inside} is centered within the instance head.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\create\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{name}\marg{creator}\marg{instance name}%
+ \marg{text above}\marg{text inside}}
+ This command is identical to |\startinst| command except it allows to specify
+ the creator of the instance. The command results in a horizontal message arrow
+ labelled with \meta{name}. The arrow starts at the current level at the
+ instance with the nickname \meta{creator} and ends at the current level at the
+ instance head of the instance with nickname \meta{instance name}.
+ As with normal messages, placement of the message label is controlled by the
+ keys |label position| and |pos|.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\stop\opt*\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{instance name}}
+ An instance is stopped with the |\stop| command.
+ The \meta{instance} is the nickname of the stopped instance. The
+ instance axis is not drawn any further below the level at which the
+ |\stop| command is issued. Also, the instance foot symbol is not
+ drawn.
+
+ If the |\stop*| command is used, then the instance foot symbol is
+ drawn instead of the stop symbol.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{stop width}{\meta{width}}{
+ The \meta{width} determines the size of the stop symbol.
+}
+
+
+Take care not to specify any events on an instance which has not yet
+been created or which has already been stopped. However, it is possible
+to create an instance after it has stopped, as showed in the next example.
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{dynamic instances}
+\declinst{i}{}{j}
+\dummyinst{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+
+\mess{p}{i}{k}
+\nextlevel[3]
+\create[label position=below]{kick}{k}{j}{}{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stop*{k}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{ok}{j}{i}
+\nextlevel
+\stop{j}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\startinst{k}{}{again}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{\MSC{} references}
+\label{references}
+Within an \MSC{} a reference to other \MSC{}s can be included. Such a
+reference is drawn as a rectangle with rounded corners, covering part
+of the \MSC{}. The following commands are used to draw \MSC{} references.
+
+\begin{command}{\referencestart\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}
+ \marg{text}\marg{left instance}\marg{right instance}}
+ The reference symbol starts at the level where the
+ |\referencestart| command is used, and ends at the level where
+ the corresponding |\referenceend| command occurs. These commands
+ correspond if they have the same \meta{nickname}.
+ The \meta{text} is
+ placed in the center of the reference symbol. The reference covers all
+ instances from \meta{leftinstance} to \meta{rightinstance}.
+
+ The left and right edge of the reference symbol are
+ \meta{nickname}|left| and \meta{nickname}|right|, where \meta{nickname} is
+ the nickname of the \MSC{} reference as defined in the
+ |\referencestart| command.
+ These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
+ instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\referenceend\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}}
+ This command end the reference \meta{nickname} that has been started with the
+ |\referencestart| command.
+\end{command}
+The following keys affect the drawing of reference symbol:
+\msckey{left reference overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} between the left edge of the reference symbol and the
+ leftmost covered instance axis.
+}
+\msckey{right reference overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} between the right edge of the reference symbol and the
+ rightmost covered instance axis.
+}
+
+The following example shows the usage of references:
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{references}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\mess{a}{j}{k}
+\nextlevel
+\referencestart{r}{a reference}{i}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{b}{rright}{k}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\referenceend{r}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\referencestart{p}{another reference}{i}{k}
+\nextlevel
+\mess{c}{envright}{pright}
+\nextlevel[4]
+\referenceend{p}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{Inline expressions}
+\label{inlines}
+An inline expression is a part of an \MSC{} on which an operation is
+defined. A rectangle surrounds the part of the \MSC{} containing the
+operands. The operands are separated by horizontal dashed lines.
+The operator is placed in the upper left corner of the inline
+expression symbol.
+The following commands are used to draw inline expressions.
+
+\begin{command}{\inlinestart\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\marg{operator}\marg{left instance}\marg{right instance}}
+ Starts the inline expression at the current level. The inline expression
+ spans over the instances from \meta{left instance} to \meta{right instance}.
+ The \meta{operand} is placed in the upper left corner of the rectangle.
+%
+ The left and right edge of the inline expression symbol are named
+ \meta{nickname}|left| and \meta{nickname}|right|, where \meta{nickname} is
+ the nickname of the inline expression as defined in the
+ |\inlinestart| command.
+ These names can be used at every place where the nickname of an
+ instance is required, e.g.\ as the sender or receiver of a message.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\inlineseparator\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}}
+ Draws a dashed line at the current level for the inline expression with
+ nickname \meta{nickname}.
+\end{command}
+\begin{command}{\inlineend\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}}
+ Ends the inline expresion with the nickname \meta{nickname} at the current level.
+ The command |\inlineend*| does the same as the command
+ |\inlineend|, except that the bottom line of the rectangle is
+ This is used to indicate that the operand is optional.
+ dashed.
+\end{command}
+
+\msckey{left inline overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} which is a distance between the left edge of the inline expression
+ symbol and the leftmost included instance axis.
+}
+\msckey{right inline overlap}{\meta{distance}}{
+ Determines the \meta{distance} which is a distance between the right edge of the inline expression
+ symbol and the rightmost included instance axis.
+}
+
+The following example shows how to draw inline expressions:
+
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{inline expressions}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\inlinestart{exp1}{par}{i}{k} \nextlevel
+\mess{a}{k}{j} \nextlevel
+\inlinestart[left inline overlap=0.6cm]
+ {exp2}{alt}{i}{j} \nextlevel[2]
+\mess{b}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\inlineseparator{exp2} \nextlevel
+\mess{c}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\inlineend{exp2} \nextlevel
+\inlineseparator{exp1} \nextlevel
+\mess{d}{j}{k} \nextlevel
+\inlineend{exp1} \nextlevel
+\inlinestart{exp3}{opt}{i}{j} \nextlevel
+\mess{e}{envright}{exp3right}
+\mess{e}{exp3right}{j} \nextlevel
+\mess{f}{j}{i} \nextlevel
+\inlineend*{exp3}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+%
+\subsection{Gates}
+\label{gates}
+
+A gate determines a connection point for messages.
+
+The following command can be used to draw gates.
+
+\begin{command}{\gate\opt{*}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{gate name}\marg{instance name}}
+ The unstarred version produces a normal (invisible) gate. The starred
+ version produces a visible gate (a small dot). The gate is drawn at the
+ current level at the instance \meta{instance name} (which can also be the
+ left and right edge of e.g.\ an \MSC{} reference). The
+ \meta{gate name} is attached to the gate. The positioning of the \meta{gate
+ name} relative to the gate is determined by the keys |side| (|left| or
+ |right|) and |position| (|above|, |mid| or |below|).
+\end{command}
+
+There are several keys to control the size and shape of the gate symbol:
+\msckey{gate symbol radius}{\meta{radius}}{
+ The \meta{radius} defines the radius of the gate symbol.
+}
+
+The next example shows a number of gates.
+\begin{codeexample}[width=\linewidth-9.6cm]
+\begin{msc}[small values]{gates}
+\declinst{i}{}{i}
+\declinst{j}{}{j}
+\declinst{k}{}{k}
+\referencestart{r}{ref}{i}{j}
+\nextlevel
+\gate{$g$}{rright}
+\mess{b}{rright}{envright}
+\gate[r][c]{$h$}{envright}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\mess{c}{rright}{k}
+\gate*[l][b]{$h'$}{rright}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\referenceend{r}
+\end{msc}
+\end{codeexample}
+
+\subsection{High-level \MSC{}s}
+\label{hmsc}
+A High-level \MSC{} (\HMSC{}) is a drawing which defines the relation between
+a number of \MSC{}s. It is composed of a start symbol (an upside down
+triangle), a number of end symbols (represented by triangles), a
+number of \MSC{} references (these are rectangles with rounded corners),
+a number of conditions (hexagons) and possibly several connection
+points (circles). These symbols are connected by arrows.
+
+The following commands can be used to draw \HMSC{}s.
+\begin{environment}{{hmsc}\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{hmsc name}\opt{(\meta{llx},\meta{lly})(\meta{urx},\meta{ury})}}
+ In order to draw \HMSC{}s, a new environment is defined, which is called
+ |hmsc|. The command to begin this environment has several
+ arguments.
+
+ The header of an \HMSC{} is
+ formed from the value of the key |hmsc keyword| (initially |hmsc|), followed by the
+ \meta{hmsc name}. The positioning of the header depends on the key
+ |title position|. The possible values are |left|, |right| and |center|. The
+ keys |title top distance| and |title distance| control the distances of the
+ header from the frame.
+ The size of the \HMSC{} frame is calculated automatically unless the optional
+ parameters (\meta{llx},\meta{lly}) and (\meta{urx},\meta{ury}) are specified. In
+ such case the frame is determined by the
+ coordinates of the lower-left corner,(\meta{llx},\meta{lly}) , and the
+ coordinates of the upper-right corner, (\meta{urx},\meta{ury}).
+\msckey{hmsc keyword}{\meta{keyword}}%
+{The \meta{keyword} will be a starting word in a header of \HMSC{}.}
+\msckey{north hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the north margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{south hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the south margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{east hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the east margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{west hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the west margin of hmsc environment}
+\msckey{west hmsc margin}{\meta{distance}}%
+{The \meta{distance} determines the west margin of hmsc environment}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/hmsc margin=\meta{distance}}
+ Sets the |north hmsc margin|, |south hmsc margin|, |west hmsc margin|,
+ |east hmsc margin| to \meta{distance}.
+\end{stylekey}
+\end{environment}
+In the \HMSC{} we can draw number of symbols. Each symbol is in fact a \tikz{}
+node and \meta{options} can be used to specify for example the placement
+relative to the other nodes. The following commands are used to draw the symbols:
+\begin{command}{\hmscstartsymbol\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nicknamee}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws an equilateral triangle pointed down representing the start symbol. The
+ \meta{nickname} can be used later as a reference to the drawn symbol. Optional
+ \meta{x} and \meta{y} specify the coordinates at which the symbol should be
+ drawn.
+\end{command}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/start symbol}
+ A style that is applied to draw a triangle node in
+ the |\hmscstartsymbol| command.
+\end{stylekey}
+\msckey{hmsc symbol width}{\meta{width}}{
+ Sets the width of the triangle of the start and end symbol in hmsc to the \meta{width}.
+}
+\begin{command}{\hmscendsymbol\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ The command in identical to |\hmscstartsymbol| command but draws an
+ equilateral triangle pointed up representing the start symbol.
+\end{command}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/end symbol}
+ A style that is applied to draw a triangle node in
+ the |\hmscendsymbol| command.
+\end{stylekey}
+\begin{command}{\hmscreference\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\marg{text}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws a \meta{text} inside a frame with rounded corners. The \meta{nickname}
+ can be used later to connect it to other hmsc elements.
+\end{command}
+\begin{stylekey}{/msc/reference}
+ A style that is applied to draw a reference node in the |\hmscreference| command.
+\end{stylekey}
+\msckey{reference height}{\meta{height}}%
+{ Sets the minimal height of the reference to \meta{height}.}
+\msckey{reference width}{\meta{width}}%
+{ Sets the minimal width of the reference to \meta{width}.}
+\begin{command}{\hmsccondion\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\marg{text}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws a \meta{text} inside a rectangular frame with diamond shaped sides. The \meta{nickname}
+ can be used later to connect it to other hmsc elements.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{hmsc condition height}{\meta{height}}%
+{ Sets the minimal height of the condition to \meta{height}.}
+\msckey{hmsc condition width}{\meta{width}}%
+{ Sets the minimal width of the condition to \meta{width}.}
+\begin{command}{\hmscconnection\opt{\oarg{options}}\marg{nickname}\opt{(\meta{x},\meta{y})}}
+ Draws a small circle symbolizing connection at coordinates
+ (\meta{x},\meta{y}). Later we can refer to the connection using \meta{nickname}.
+\end{command}
+\msckey{hmsc connection radius}{\meta{distance}}%
+{ Sets the radius of the connection symbol to the \meta{distance}}
+
+The \HMSC{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
+\HMSC{} symbols (|startsymbol|, |endsymbol|, |reference|,
+|condition|, and |connection|).
+The center of each symbol is drawn on the grid point
+with coordinates (\meta{x},\meta{y}). Each symbol also has a \meta{nickname}
+for later reference.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\hmscreference{nickname}{text}(x,y)
+\hmsccondition{nickname}{text}(x,y)
+\hmscconnection{nickname}(x,y)
+\arrow{from-nickname}[coord-list]{to-nickname}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\HMSC{} symbols can be connected by means of the \verb+arrow+ command.
+This draws an arrow from the symbol with nickname \verb+from-nickname+
+to the symbol with nickname \verb+to-nickname+. The optional argument
+\verb+coord-list+ can be used if the line connecting the source and
+the destination should not be straight. The \verb+coord-list+ has
+the following syntax: \verb+(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xk,yk)+. This means
+that the connecting line goes through the points with coordinates
+(x1,y1), (x2,y2), \ldots, (xk,yk).
+
+Arrows always leave the start symbol at the bottom. They enter the end symbol
+at the top.
+Arrows start and end either at the middle of the top or at the middle
+of the bottom of a reference and condition symbol. The incoming
+(outgoing) direction of the arrow determines whether it will start
+(end) at the top or at the bottom.
+
+There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
+symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}). These are
+\verb+\hmscconditionheight+ (the height of the condition symbol),
+\verb+\hmscconditionwidth+ (the width of the condition symbol,
+excluding the left and right angular parts),
+\verb+\hmscreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\hmscreference width+ (the width of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\messarrowscale{size}+ (a command to set the size of the arrow
+head of a connection line);
+\verb+setconnectiontype(type)+ (set the shape of the polyline
+connection the symbols; \verb+type+ can be \verb+straight+,
+\verb+rounded+, and \verb+curved+),
+\verb+\startsymbolwidth+ (the width of the start and end symbol),
+\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \HMSC{} frame
+and the \HMSC{} header).
+
+An example of an \HMSC{} is in the following diagram. Notice that the
+width and height of reference symbols are changed locally (i.e.,
+between \verb+{+ and \verb+}+ braces) just before the big
+reference~\verb+b+ is defined.
+
+\medskip
+
+\noindent
+\begin{minipage}[c]{0.375\linewidth}
+
+\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
+\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
+\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
+\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
+{
+\mscset{reference width=2cm}
+\mscset{reference height=2\baselineskip}
+% \setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
+% \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}{3\baselineskip}
+\hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
+ {\centering
+ this is a big
+ hmsc reference}
+ }(0,6)
+}
+\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.25)
+\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
+\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
+\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
+\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
+\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
+
+\arrow{s}{a}
+\arrow{a}{c}
+\arrow{c}{b}
+\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
+\arrow{b}{q}
+\arrow{q}{e1}
+\arrow{b}{ok}
+\arrow{ok}{do}
+\arrow{do}{e2}
+\arrow{b}{t}
+\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
+\end{hmsc}
+\end{minipage}\hfill
+\begin{minipage}[c]{0.6\linewidth}
+{\footnotesize
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{hmsc}{High level}(-3,0)(3,12)
+\hmscstartsymbol{s}(0,10)
+\hmscreference{a}{A}(0,9)
+\hmscconnection{c}(0,7.5)
+{\setlength{\hmscreferencewidth}{2cm}
+ \setlength{\hmscreferenceheight}
+ {3\baselineskip}
+ \hmscreference{b}{\parbox{1.9cm}
+ {\centering this is a big hmsc reference}
+ }(0,6)}
+\hmsccondition{t}{Again}(1,4.5)
+\hmsccondition{ok}{Ok}(0,3.5)
+\hmsccondition{q}{\textit{Break}}(-2,3.5)
+\hmscendsymbol{e1}(-2,2)
+\hmscreference{do}{Do it!}(0,2)
+\hmscendsymbol{e2}(0,1)
+\arrow{s}{a}
+\arrow{a}{c}
+\arrow{c}{b}
+\arrow{c}[(-2,7.5)]{q}
+\arrow{b}{q}
+\arrow{q}{e1}
+\arrow{b}{ok}
+\arrow{ok}{do}
+\arrow{do}{e2}
+\arrow{b}{t}
+\arrow{t}[(1,3.5)(2.5,3.5)(2.5,7.5)]{c}
+\end{hmsc}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+\end{minipage}
+
+
+\subsection{\MSC{} documents}
+\label{mscdoc}
+An \MSCdoc{} is a drawing which contains various declarations
+of objects used in the \MSC{} description. For drawing \MSCdoc{}s
+he following commands are provided.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{mscdoc}[headerpos]{mscdocname}{text}(llx,lly)(urx,ury)
+\end{mscdoc}
+\reference{text}(x,y)
+\separator{y}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+As for \MSC{} and \HMSC{}, a new environment is defined, which is named
+\verb+mscdoc+. The command to begin an \MSCdoc{} has several
+arguments. The argument \verb+headerpos+ is optional. It controls
+positioning of the header of the \MSCdoc{}.
+This argument can have values
+\verb+l+ (for a left aligned header), \verb+c+ (for a centered header)
+and \verb+r+ (for a right aligned header).
+The header of an \MSCdoc{} is formed from the keyword \verb+mscdocument+,
+followed by the \verb+mscdocname+.
+The \verb+text+ is placed left-aligned below the \MSCdoc{} header.
+The size of the \MSCdoc{} frame is determined by
+coordinates of the lower-left corner, \verb+(llx,lly)+, and the
+coordinates of the upper-right corner, \verb+(urx,ury)+.
+
+The \MSCdoc{} grid is not drawn, but used to control the positioning of the
+\MSC{} references.
+The center of such a reference is drawn on the grid point
+with coordinates \verb+{x,y}+.
+
+The \verb+separator+ command draws a dashed horizontal line. The \MSC{}
+references above the separator are the exported, while the ones below
+the separator are local.
+
+There are several parameters to control the size and shape of the
+symbols (see Section~\ref{parameters}).
+\verb+\mscdocreferenceheight+ (the height of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\mscdocreferencewidth+ (the width of the reference symbol),
+\verb+\topnamedist+ (sets the distance between the top of the \MSCdoc{}
+frame and the \MSCdoc{} header).
+
+An example of an \MSCdoc{} is in the following diagram. Notice that
+the size of references in an \MSCdoc{} had to be changed for the last
+reference.
+
+\medskip
+
+
+\begin{minipage}{0.4\linewidth}
+\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
+ (0,0)(6,8)
+\reference{a}(1,6)
+\reference{b}(3,6)
+\reference{c}(1,4)
+\reference{d}(3,4)
+\separator{3}
+\mscset{reference width=4.5cm}
+\mscset{reference height=2\baselineskip}
+\reference{%
+ \parbox{4cm}%
+ {\raggedright This is a
+ two-line reference}}
+ (3,1.5)
+\end{mscdoc}
+\end{minipage}
+%
+\begin{minipage}{0.5\linewidth}
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{mscdoc}{My declarations}%
+ (0,0)(6,8)
+\reference{a}(1,6)
+\reference{b}(3,6)
+\reference{c}(1,4)
+\reference{d}(3,4)
+\separator{3}
+\mscset{reference width=4.5cm}
+\mscset{reference height=2\baselineskip}
+\reference{%
+ \parbox{4cm}%
+ {\raggedright This is a
+ two-line reference}}
+ (3,1.5)
+\end{mscdoc}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+\end{minipage}
+
+
+
+\section{Style parameters}
+\label{parameters}
+\definecolor{markColor}{rgb}{0.10,0.10,0.9}
+
+\makeatletter
+\NewDocumentCommand{\measureMark}{%
+ s % arrows outside the measured distance
+ D<>{1.5pt} % offset of marks
+ O{.75cm} % offset of label
+ m % first point
+ m % second point
+ m % label
+ D<>{o} % () coordinates -> angle
+ % h -> horizontal,
+ % v -> vertical
+ % o or what ever -> oblique
+ O{} % options for tikzset
+ }{%
+
+ {\tikzset{#8}
+
+ \coordinate (@1) at #4 ;
+ \coordinate (@2) at #5 ;
+
+ \if #7v % vertical
+ \coordinate (@0) at ($($#4!.5!#5$) + (#3,0)$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at (@0|-@1) ;
+ \coordinate (@5) at (@0|-@2) ;
+ \else
+ \if #7h % horizontal
+ \coordinate (@0) at ($($#4!.5!#5$) + (0,#3)$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at (@0-|@1) ;
+ \coordinate (@5) at (@0-|@2) ;
+ \else % cotation encoche
+ \ifnum\pdfstrcmp{\unexpanded\expandafter{\@car#7\@nil}}{(}=\z@
+ \coordinate (@5) at ($#7!#3!#5$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at ($#7!#3!#4$) ;
+ \else % cotation oblique
+ \coordinate (@5) at ($#5!#3!90:#4$) ;
+ \coordinate (@4) at ($#4!#3!-90:#5$) ;
+ \fi\fi\fi
+
+ \draw[dotted,very thin,shorten >= #2,shorten <= -2*#2] (@4) -- #4 ;
+ \draw[dotted,very thin,shorten >= #2,shorten <= -2*#2] (@5) -- #5 ;
+
+ \IfBooleanTF #1 {% with star
+ \draw[measureMark arrow,-,draw=none] (@4) -- (@5)
+ node[measureMark node] {#6\strut};
+ \draw[measureMark arrow,<-] (@4) -- ($(@4)!-2pt!(@5)$) ;
+ \draw[measureMark arrow,<-] (@5) -- ($(@5)!-2pt!(@4)$) ;
+ }{% without star
+ \ifnum\pdfstrcmp{\unexpanded\expandafter{\@car#7\@nil}}{(}=\z@
+ \draw[measureMark arrow] (@5) to[bend right]
+ node[measureMark node] {#6\strut} (@4) ;
+ \else
+ \draw[measureMark arrow] (@4) -- (@5)
+ node[measureMark node] {#6\strut};
+ \fi
+ }}
+ }
+\makeatother
+
+By means of a collection of parameters, the graphical appearance of
+an \MSC{} can be fine tuned to the user's taste.
+The general parameters
+are displayed in Figure~\ref{parametersfig} on page~\pageref{parametersfig}.
+%
+% %========================
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+ \begin{msc}[right environment distance=2.3cm]{Lengths}
+ \tikzset{%
+ measureMark node/.style={%
+ midway,
+ sloped,
+ fill=white,
+ text = markColor,
+ font=\footnotesize,
+ inner sep=1.5pt,
+ outer sep=2pt
+ },
+ measureMark arrow/.style={%
+ <->,
+ >=latex,
+ very thin,dashed
+ },
+ dimen/.style={<->,>=latex,thin,every rectangle node/.style={fill=white,midway,font=\sffamily}},
+ symmetry/.style={dashed,thin},
+ }
+ \declinst{m1}{aname}{iname}
+ \declinst{st}{}{}
+ \declinst{m2}{}{}
+
+ \mess{msg1}{m1}{st}
+ \nextlevel
+ \mess{msg2}{m1}{st}
+ \nextlevel
+ \mess{self}{m1}{m1}
+ \coregionstart{m2}
+ \nextlevel[2]
+ \coregionend{m2}
+ \nextlevel
+ \lost[r]{x}{}{m2}
+ \stop{st}
+ \settimer{T}{m1}
+ \nextlevel
+ \inlinestart[left inline overlap=0.9cm,right inline overlap=0.5cm]{alt}{alt}{m1}{m1}
+ \nextlevel[2]
+ \inlineend{alt}
+ \action{a}{m2}
+ \nextlevel
+ \referencestart{ref}{\small reference}{m1}{m1}
+ \nextlevel
+ \referenceend{ref}
+ \nextlevel
+ \gate*{}{m1}
+ \nextlevel
+ \condition{cond1}{m1,m2}
+ \nextlevel[3]
+ \mess{msg3}{m2}{m1}
+ \makeatletter
+ \msc@endmsc[]
+ \makeatother
+
+ \measureMark*[-2.5cm]{($(msc@env@nw)+(\mscget{title distance},0cm)$)}{($(msc@env@nw)+
+ (\mscget{title distance},-\mscget{title top distance})$)}%
+ {title top distance}%
+ [measureMark node/.append style={above right=-36pt and -2pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-0.8cm]{($(msc@env@nw)+(0cm,-\mscget{title top distance}-1em)$)}{($(msc@env@nw)+
+ (\mscget{title distance},-\mscget{title top distance}-1em)$)}%
+ {title distance}[measureMark node/.append style={left=6pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-1.1cm]{(msc@nodem1.north)}{($(msc@nodem1.north)+ (0cm,\mscget{label distance})$)}%
+ {label distance}[measureMark node/.append style={above left=6pt and 9pt,rotate=-90}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-1.6cm]{($(msc@level2-|msc@nodem1)+(1.5cm,0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level2-|msc@nodem1)+ (1.5cm,\mscget{label distance})$)}%
+ {label distance}[measureMark node/.append style={above left=6pt and 9pt,rotate=-90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.0cm]{($(msc@env@nw)+(4cm,0)$)}{(msc@nodest.north)}%
+ {head top distance}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc@env@nw)+(0,-3cm)$)}{(msc@nodem1.south)}%
+ {left environment distance}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={above left=0pt and -7pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[1.0cm]{($(msc@nodem1.south)+(-\mscget{self message
+ width},-2.4cm)$)}{($(msc@nodem1.south)+(0cm,-2.4cm)$)}%
+ {self message width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=8pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[0.21cm]{($(msc@nodem1.south)+(-\mscget{self message width}-
+ \mscget{timer width}/2,-2.9cm)$)}
+ {($(msc@nodem1.south)+(-\mscget{self message width}+\mscget{timer width}/2,-2.9cm)$)}%
+ {timer width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=7pt,yshift=1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.17cm]{($(msc@level8-|msc@nodem1)+(-0.9cm,-10pt)$)}
+ {($(msc@level8-|msc@nodem1)+(0,-10pt)$)}%
+ {left inline overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=12pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.17cm]{($(msc@level8-|msc@nodem1)+(0.5cm,-2pt)$)}
+ {($(msc@level8-|msc@nodem1)+(0,-2pt)$)}%
+ {right inline overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={right=6pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.0cm]{($(msc@level11-|msc@nodem1)+(-\mscget{left reference overlap},4pt)$)}
+ {($(msc@level11-|msc@nodem1)+(0,4pt)$)}%
+ {left reference overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={left=14pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[-0.2cm]{($(msc@level12-|msc@nodem1)+(0,\mscget{gate symbol radius})$)}
+ {($(msc@level12-|msc@nodem1)$)}%
+ {gate symbol radius}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={left=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[-0.3cm]{($(msc@level17-|msc@nodem1)+(-\mscget{instance width}/2,0pt)$)}
+ {($(msc@level17-|msc@nodem1)+(\mscget{instance width}/2,0pt)$)}%
+ {instance width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={below=0pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{(msc@level0-|msc@nodest)}
+ {(msc@level1-|msc@nodest)}%
+ {first level height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{(msc@level1-|msc@nodest)}
+ {(msc@level2-|msc@nodest)}%
+ {level height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{(msc@nodem2.north east)}
+ {(msc@nodem2.south east)}%
+ {head height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc@level3-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{region width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level3-|msc@nodem2)+(-\mscget{region width}/2,0)$)}%
+ {region width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=5pt}]
+
+ \measureMark*[0.2cm]{($(msc@level6-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{self message width},\mscget{lost symbol radius})$)}
+ {($(msc@level6-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{self message width},0pt)$)}%
+ {lost symbol radius}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=0pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[-0.2cm]{($(msc@level6-|msc@nodest)+(-\mscget{stop width}/2,-\mscget{stop width}/2)$)}
+ {($(msc@level6-|msc@nodest)+(\mscget{stop width}/2,-\mscget{stop width}/2)$)}%
+ {stop width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=7pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[-0.2cm]{($(msc@level4-|msc@nodem1)$)}
+ {($(msc@level4-|msc@nodest)$)}%
+ {instance\\ distance}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,fill=none,yshift=-1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc@level9-|msc@nodem2)+(-\mscget{action width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level9-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{action width}/2,0)$)}%
+ {action width}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,above=-1pt,xshift=3pt}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc@level9-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{action width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level9-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{action width}/2,-\mscget{action height})$)}%
+ {action height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.5cm]{($(msc@level13-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level13-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},-\mscget{condition height})$)}%
+ {condition height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc@level13-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level13-|msc@nodem2)+(0,0pt)$)}%
+ {right condition overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,above=-1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark<2pt>[0.2cm]{($(msc@level13-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{condition overlap},0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level13-|msc@nodem2)+(0,0pt)$)}%
+ {right condition overlap}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,above=-1pt}]
+
+ \measureMark<2pt>[0.2cm]{($(msc@level16-|msc@nodem2)+(0,0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level17-|msc@nodem2)+(0,0pt)$)}%
+ {last level height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=-2pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark*[0.2cm]{($(msc@level17-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{instance width}/2,0)$)}
+ {($(msc@level17-|msc@nodem2)+(\mscget{instance width}/2,-\mscget{foot height})$)}%
+ {foot height}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark<0pt>[0.0cm]{($(msc@level17-|msc@nodem2)+(0.3cm,-\mscget{foot height})$)}
+ {($(msc@env@se-|msc@nodem2)+(0.3cm,0)$)}%
+ {foot distance}<v>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,left=-1pt,rotate=90}]
+
+ \measureMark[0.2cm]{($(msc@env@se)+(0,7.5cm)$)}{(msc@nodem2.south)}%
+ {right\\ environment\\ distance}<h>[measureMark node/.append style={align=left,right=33pt}]
+
+ \mscset{draw frame=none,msc keyword={},msc/name={}}
+ \end{msc}
+
+ \caption{User controllable parameters}
+ \label{parametersfig}
+\end{figure}
+%
+% The value of a parameter can be changed using standard
+% \LaTeX\ commands, e.g.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \setlength{\levelheight}{1cm}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The following list describes all parameters.
+% The default values for drawing \MSC{}s at large, normal and small size are
+% included. See the command \verb+\setmscvalues{size}+ below for
+% restoring the parameters to their original values.
+%
+% %========================
+% \begin{defs}
+%
+% \item[\cmd{actionheight}]
+% Height of action symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{actionwidth}]
+% Width of action symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.25}{1.25}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{bottomfootdist}]
+% Distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.7}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{commentdist}]
+% Distance between a comment and its instance.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{conditionheight}]
+% Height of condition symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{conditionoverlap}]
+% Overlap of condition symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{envinstdist}]
+% Distance between environments and nearest instance line.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{2.5}{2.0}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{firstlevelheight}] Height of level just below head
+% symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{gatesymbolradius}] Radius of the gate symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} mm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscconditionheight}]
+% Height of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscconditionwidth}]
+% Width of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscconnectionradius}]
+% Radius of \HMSC{} connection symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.06}{0.05}{0.04} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscreferenceheight}]
+% Height of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscreferencewidth}]
+% Width of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbolwidth}]
+% Width of \HMSC{} start symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.3} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{inlineoverlap}]
+% Overlap of inline symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instbarwidth}]
+% Default width of vertical instance bars (applies to fat instances only).\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.0}{0.0}{0.0} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instdist}]
+% Distance between instance axes.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{3.0}{2.2}{1.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instfootheight}] Height of foot symbols. Should not be
+% changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.25}{0.2}{0.15} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instheadheight}] Height of head symbols. Should not be
+% changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.55}{0.5} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{instwidth}]
+% Width of header and foot symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.75}{1.6}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{labeldist}]
+% Distance between labels and the symbols to which they belong (for instance, message labels and arrows).\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} ex.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{lastlevelheight}] Height of level just above foot
+% symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.3} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{leftnamedist}] Distance between left of the frame and
+% (left of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.1} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{levelheight}]
+% Height of a level.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{lostsymbolradius}]
+% Radius of the lost and found symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.15}{0.12}{0.08} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{markdist}]
+% Horizontal distance from a mark to its instance.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{measuredist}]
+% Horizontal distance from a measure to its (closest) instance.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{measuresymbolwidth}]
+% Width of a measure symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{mscdocreferenceheight}]
+% Height of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{mscdocreferencewidth}]
+% Width of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{referenceoverlap}]
+% Overlap of reference symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{regionbarwidth}]
+% Width of region bars.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{selfmesswidth}]
+% Length of horizontal arms of self messages.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{stopwidth}]
+% Width of the stop symbol.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.3} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{timerwidth}]
+% Width of the \emph{timer} symbols.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.4}{0.3}{0.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{topheaddist}]
+% Distance between top of head symbols and frame.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.3}{1.2} cm.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{topnamedist}] Distance between top of the frame and
+% (top of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
+% (\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.2} cm.)
+%
+% \end{defs}
+%
+% In addition there are several commands which allow the user to adjust
+% the \MSC{} drawing to his own taste.
+%
+% \begin{defs}
+%
+% \item[\cmd{messarrowscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale
+% factor (a positive real number) of message arrow
+% heads. (\lnsvalue{2}{1.5}{1.2})
+%
+% \item[\cmd{setmscscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale factor
+% of the \MSC{} environment to \emph{scalefactor}. the scale factor is
+% supposed to be a real number. Scaling is done when the \MSC{}
+% environment ends (\verb|\end{msc}|). The default of \emph{scalefactor}
+% is~1. A more consistent way for
+% varying the size of the \MSC{} can be obtained by using the
+% \verb+\setmesvalues+ command as described below.
+% (default value 1.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{psset}\{\texttt{linewidth=D}\}] This command sets the width
+% of all lines in \MSC{}s, \HMSC{}s, and \MSCdoc{}s to length \verb+D+. If
+% this command is issued outside the msc environment, then the value is
+% set for the complete document. If it is used directly after the start
+% of the msc environment it only holds for this \MSC{}.\\
+% (large/normal/small value 0.8/0.7/0.6 pt.)
+%
+% \item[\cmd{setfootcolor}\{\emph{color}\}] Sets the color of the foot
+% symbols of \MSC{} instances. Possible values are \emph{black},
+% \emph{white}, \emph{gray}, or \emph{lightgray}. For more color values,
+% see the documentation of the \LaTeXe{} \textsf{color} package.
+%
+% \end{defs}
+%
+% The following command can be used to set the above mentioned
+% style parameters to suitable values.
+%
+% \begin{defs}
+% \item[\cmd{setmscvalues}\{\emph{size}\}] Sets all parameters of the \mscpack{} to
+% predefined values. Valid values for \emph{size} are:
+% \verb|small|, \verb|normal|, and \verb|large|.
+% (The default value of \verb+size+ is \verb+normal+.
+% This can be used for drawings with at maximum six instances on a
+% sheet of A4 paper.
+% For sizes \verb+large+ and \verb+small+, a maximum of four and nine
+% instances respectively fit on a sheet of A4 paper.)
+% \end{defs}
+%
+% Caution has to be taken when changing the value of a parameter within
+% the \MSC{} definition. The following parameters can be changed within an
+% \MSC{} definition without unexpected side effects:
+%
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% \verb+\actionheight+,
+% \verb+\actionwidth+,
+% \verb+\bottomfootdist+,
+% \verb+\conditionheight+,
+% \verb+\conditionoverlap+,
+% \verb+\inlineoverlap+,
+% \verb+\instfootheight+,
+% \verb+\instwidth+ (however, this may cause different sizes of
+% corresponding instance header and footer symbols),
+% \verb+\labeldist+,
+% \verb+\lastlevelheight+,
+% \verb+\levelheight+,
+% \verb+\lostsymbolradius+,
+% \verb+\referenceoverlap+,
+% \verb+\regionbarwidth+,
+% \verb+\selfmesswidth+,
+% \verb+\stopwidth+,
+% \verb+\timerwidth+, and
+% \verb+\topnamedist+.
+% \end{flushleft}
+%
+%
+% In addition to the parameters specific to the \mscpack,
+% standard \LaTeX\ commands can be used to change the type style and
+% other details.
+% For example, if the command \verb+\sffamily+ is included directly after
+% the start of the msc environment, the text in the \MSC{}
+% is drawn using a {\sf sans serif} font. Likewise, the text size can be
+% changed by inserting, e.g., the command \verb+\small+.
+% The \verb+\raisebox+ and \verb+\parbox+ commands
+% can also be used to position and format names.
+
+
+\section{Example}
+\label{example}
+Figure~\ref{ex} on page~\pageref{ex} shows the \MSC{} defined in the
+following \LaTeX\ fragment.
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{msc}{Example}
+\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
+\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
+\dummyinst{m2}
+\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
+
+\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
+\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
+\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
+\order{m1}{m2}[4]
+\action{a}{m3}
+
+\nextlevel
+\found{msg x}{}{usr}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
+\coregionstart{m1}
+\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+
+\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
+\coregionstart{m2}
+\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
+\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
+\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m2}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m1}
+\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
+\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+
+\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
+\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stop{usr}
+
+\end{msc}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+\begin{figure}[htb]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{msc}{Example}
+\declinst{usr}{The user}{User}
+\declinst{m1}{Control}{M1}
+\dummyinst{m2}
+\declinst{m3}{Another Machine}{M3}
+
+\create{start}{m1}{m2}{Processing}{M2}
+\mess{msg 0}{envleft}{usr}
+\mess{msg 1}{envright}{m2}[1]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 2}{usr}{m1}
+\order{m1}{m2}[4]
+\action{a}{m3}
+
+\nextlevel
+\found{msg x}{}{usr}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 3}{usr}{m2}[-1]
+\coregionstart{m1}
+\settimeout{S}{m3}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+
+\mess{msg 4}{m1}{usr}
+\coregionstart{m2}
+\settimer[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess[r]{msg 5}{m2}{m2}[3]
+\mess{msg 6}{usr}{usr}[2]
+\nextlevel
+
+\mess{msg 7}{m2}{usr}
+\timeout[r]{T}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m2}
+\nextlevel
+
+\coregionend{m1}
+\stoptimer[r]{T'}{m3}
+\nextlevel
+
+\lost[r]{msg y}{Mach 1}{usr}
+\mess{msg 8}{m1}{envright}
+\nextlevel
+
+\condition{condition 1}{usr,m2}
+\setstoptimer[r]{U}{m3}
+\nextlevel[2]
+\stop{usr}
+
+\end{msc}
+
+\caption{A menagerie of \MSC{} symbols}
+\label{ex}
+\end{center}
+\end{figure}
+
+
+\section{Acknowledgments}
+Thanks are due to the following people for providing us with useful
+input: Cas Cremers, Hugo Jonker, Peter Peters, Sa\v{s}a Radomirovi\'c,
+Michel Reniers, and Pim Vullers.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{biblio}
+\printindex
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 8423cc8ade6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 84d60381633..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/msc/refman.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1547 +0,0 @@
-% file: refman.tex
-% Copyright 2008 V. Bos, T. van Deursen, and S. Mauw
-% This file is part of the MSC Macro Package.
-%
-\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
-\usepackage{a4wide}
-
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{msc}
-
-\newlength{\rpwidth}
-\setlength{\rpwidth}{.5cm}
-\newlength{\rpheight}
-\setlength{\rpheight}{0.5\levelheight}
-\newcommand{\rpN}{%
- \psframe(-0.5\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](0\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{n}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{ne}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{e}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSE}{%
- \psframe(-\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(0\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](-.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{se}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpS}{%
- \psframe(-.5\rpwidth,\rpheight)(.5\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[t](0\rpwidth,0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{s}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpSW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,0\rpheight)(\rpwidth,\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,0.2\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{sw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-.5\rpheight)(\rpwidth,.5\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.3\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{w}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-\newcommand{\rpNW}{%
- \psframe(0\rpwidth,-\rpheight)(\rpwidth,0\rpheight)%
- \rput[B](.5\rpwidth,-0.8\rpheight){\footnotesize \textsc{nw}}%
- \pscircle[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black](0\rpwidth,0\rpheight){.5\labeldist}%
-}
-
-
-
-% The following code is taken from the doc package. It defines a global
-% macro \bslash that produces a bslash (if present in the current font).
-\makeatletter
-{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12 |gdef|bslash{\}}
-\makeatother
-\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\bslash #1}}
-
-\usepackage{url}
-\newcommand{\acro}[1]{{\scshape\lowercase{#1}}}
-
-\newcommand\MSC{\acro{MSC}}
-\newcommand\HMSC{\acro{HMSC}}
-\newcommand{\MSCdoc}{\MSC{}doc}
-\newcommand{\mscpack}{\MSC{} macro package}
-
-\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\opt}[1]{[#1]}
-\newcommand{\cmdarg}[1]{\{\emph{#1}\}}
-\newcommand{\coordarg}[1]{\emph{#1}}
-\newcommand{\coordargs}[2]{(\coordarg{#1},\coordarg{#2})}
-\newcommand{\lnsvalue}[3]{large/normal/small value #1/#2/#3}
-
-\newenvironment{defs}{%
- \begin{list}{}%
- {\setlength{\labelwidth}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{1em}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{1em}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{1ex}%
- \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\rightmargin}{0pt}%
- \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{##1}%
- \raggedright%
- }%
- }{%
- \end{list}}
-
-\title{
- A \LaTeX\ macro package for Message Sequence Charts\\{\large Reference Manual}
-}
-
-\author{
- \begin{tabular}{c}
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- Victor Bos &
- Ton van Deursen &
- Sjouke Mauw \\
- &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg &
- \scriptsize Universit\'e du Luxembourg \\[-0.8ex]
- \scriptsize \texttt{vbos@abo.fi} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{ton.vandeursen@uni.lu} &
- \scriptsize \texttt{sjouke.mauw@uni.lu}
- \end{tabular}\\
- \end{tabular}
-}
-
-\date{\small Version \mscversion, last update \today\\
- Describing \mscpack{} version \mscversion}
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-\maketitle
-
-\tableofcontents
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-The \mscpack{} was developed to draw (actually, to write)
-\emph{Message Sequence Charts} (\MSC{}s) with \LaTeX. The current
-version supports most of the \MSC{} language standardized
-in~\cite{z120}. The manual~\cite{BM02a} describes how to use the
-\mscpack{} and is illustrated with numerous examples. This reference manual
-briefly describes the main concepts of the package and it provides
-lists of all available environments and commands. In addition, it
-lists both the user-definable lengths and the internal lengths that
-are used by the package to compute the layout of \MSC{}s.
-\section{Concepts}
-
-The \mscpack{} offers three different kinds
-of diagrams:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item \MSC{} diagrams (normal \MSC{}s)
-\item \HMSC{} diagrams (high level \MSC{}s)
-\item \MSCdoc{} diagrams (\MSC{} documents)
-\end{itemize}
-For each of these diagrams, the package provides a \LaTeX{}
-environment. Figure~\ref{fig:types:of:diagrams} shows an example of
-each diagram. The source code for these diagrams is given in
-Figure~\ref{fig:sources}. Depending on the environment, different
-\mscpack{} commands can be used. Furthermore, since each environment
-is implemented as a \texttt{pspicture} (see \textsf{pstricks}
-documentation), it is possible to use \textsf{pstricks} commands
-inside the \MSC{} environments.
-
-\begin{figure}
-\begin{center}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{tabular}{ccc}
-\begin{msc}%
- {Example 1}%
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}%
-%
-&
-\begin{hmsc}%
- {Example 2}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\hmscstartsymbol{S}(2,3.75)
-\hmscconnection{c}(2,3.25)
-\hmscreference{R1}{A}(2,2.5)
-\hmsccondition{C}{?}(2,1.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{E}(1.5,0.5)
-\arrow{S}{c}
-\arrow{c}{R1}
-\arrow{R1}{C}
-\arrow{C}
- [(2.5,1)(3,1)(3,3.25)]
- {c}
-\arrow{C}[(1.5,1)]{E}
-\end{hmsc}%
-&
-\begin{mscdoc}%
- {Example 3}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\reference{A}(1,3.0)
-\reference{B}(3,3.0 )
-\separator{2.0}
-\reference{C}(2,1.0)
-\end{mscdoc}%
-\\
-(a) \MSC{} diagram &
-(b) \HMSC{} diagram &
-(c) \MSCdoc{} diagram
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-\caption{Examples of different diagrams}
-\label{fig:types:of:diagrams}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\hrulefill
-\begin{center}
-\begin{minipage}[t]{0.3\linewidth}
-\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}%
- {Example 1}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{a}{i}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\mess{b}{j}{i}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-\hfil
-\begin{minipage}[t]{0.3\linewidth}
-\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{hmsc}%
- {Example 2}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\hmscstartsymbol{S}(2,3.75)
-\hmscconnection{c}(2,3.25)
-\hmscreference{R1}{A}(2,2.5)
-\hmsccondition{C}{?}(2,1.5)
-\hmscendsymbol{E}(1.5,0.5)
-\arrow{S}{c}
-\arrow{c}{R1}
-\arrow{R1}{C}
-\arrow{C}
- [(2.5,1)(3,1)(3,3.25)]
- {c}
-\arrow{C}[(1.5,1)]{E}
-\end{hmsc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-\hfil
-\begin{minipage}[t]{0.3\linewidth}
-\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{mscdoc}%
- {Example 3}%
- (0,0)(4,4.65)
-\reference{A}(1,3.0)
-\reference{B}(3,3.0 )
-\separator{2.0}
-\reference{C}(2,1.0)
-\end{mscdoc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{minipage}
-\end{center}
-\hrulefill
-\caption{Source code for diagrams of Figure~\ref{fig:types:of:diagrams}}
-\label{fig:sources}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-The \MSC{} environment provides most functionality of the package. The
-following concepts should help in understanding the user-commands of
-this environment.
-
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\emph{current height}] The \emph{current height} of an \MSC{} is a
-length that indicates the y-postion relative to the top of the msc
-frame. The \MSC{} drawing commands use this y-position to draw msc
-symbols, e.g., instance heads, messages, actions, and instance
-feet. The internal length \verb|\msc@currentheight| is the current
-height. This variables is changed whenever the command
-\verb|\nextlevel| is invoked.
-
-\item[\emph{current width}] The \emph{current width} of an \MSC{} is the
-distance from the left side of the \MSC{} frame to the right side of the
-\MSC{} frame. As such, it depends on the lengths \verb|\envinstdist| and
-\verb|\instdist| as well as on the number of instances. The internal
-length \verb|\msc@currentwidth| is the current width. During
-construction of an msc, that is, in between \verb|\begin{msc}| and
-\verb|\end{msc}|, \verb|\msc@currentwidth| is equal to
-$\verb|\envinstdist| + (n \times \verb|instdist|)$, provided that~$n$ is
-the number of instances defined so far (see \verb|\mscinstcnt| in the
-section \emph{Internal counters} below) and the length
-\verb|\instdist| is not changed between instances. At the end of an
-\MSC{} construction, an additional \verb|\envinstdist| is added to
-\verb|\msc@currentwidth|. The \verb|\msc@currentwidth| determines the
-x-position of new \MSC{} instances.
-
-\item[\emph{level}] A level is a horizontal layer in an \MSC{} which is
-used to construct msc's in a top-down fashion. Each level is
-\verb|\levelheight| units high and spans the complete width of the
-msc. The first level starts at $\verb|\topheaddist| +
-\verb|\instheadheight| + \verb|\firstlevelheight|$ units below the top
-of the \MSC{} frame. The \verb|\nextlevel| commands advances the \MSC{} to
-the next (lower) level.
-
-\item[\emph{\MSC{} instance}] The main building blocks of MSC diagrams
-are \emph{instances}. Instances are represented by vertical
-bars. \emph{Fat} instances are represented by two vertical
-lines. Usually, an instance has both a head symbol and a foot symbol.
-In the \mscpack, each \MSC{} instance has a \emph{nickname} by which
-the instance is identified. In the \mscpack{} there are special
-instances:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item The left environment (nickname \verb|envleft|).
-
-\item The right environment (nickname \verb|envright|).
-
-\item The left side of an inline expression. If the nickname of the
-inline expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmleft|.
-
-\item The right side of an inline expression. If the nickname of the
-inline expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmright|.
-
-\item The left side of an reference expression. If the nickname of the
-reference expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmleft|.
-
-\item The right side of an reference expression. If the nickname of the
-reference expression is \verb|nm|, the nickname of the left side is
-\verb|nmright|.
-
-\item A \emph{dummy} instance is an instance that is invisible; it
-reserves space needed to draw an instance. It is useful to create
-(see \verb|create| command) instances with create-messages.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-\item[\emph{nickname}] A nickname is a unique identification of an
-\emph{instance}.
-
-\item[\emph{message label reference points}] In order to place a
-message label somewhere near the message arrow, the \mscpack{}
-computes a \emph{reference point} for each message label. This is a
-location on the bounding box of the label such that the distance
-between the arrow and the reference point is minimized. Figures
-\ref{fig:refpoints} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints})
-and~\ref{fig:refpoints:B} (page~\pageref{fig:refpoints:B}) show the
-location of reference points for all possible locations of message
-labels. Note that the boxes with the location of the reference points
-are not generated by the \LaTeX{} code given in these figures; we
-enriched the \LaTeX{} code with some extra \textsf{pstricks} code (see
-\LaTeX{} source code of this document).
-
-\end{defs}
-
-\begin{figure}[!htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\begin{figure}[!htb]
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpS}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{\rpN}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpE}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpW}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{\rpW}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{\rpE}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{\rpSE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{\rpNW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\bigskip
-
-\footnotesize
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Label reference points (2)}
-\declinst{m0}{I0}{}
-\declinst{m1}{I1}{}
-\declinst{m2}{I2}{}
-\nextlevel
-
-\mess{S}{m0}[.9]{m1}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{S}{m1}[.9]{m0}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{N}[b]{m2}{m1}
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{E}{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{W}{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[4]
-\mess{W}[r]{m0}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess[r]{E}[l]{m2}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SW}{m0}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SW}{m1}[.9]{m0}[-2]
-\mess{NE}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-
-\mess{SE}{m1}[.9]{m0}[2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m2}[.9]{m1}[2]
-\nextlevel[6]
-
-\mess{SE}{m0}[.9]{m1}[-2]
-\mess{NW}[b]{m1}[.9]{m2}[-2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{multicols}
-\end{minipage}
-\caption{Reference points of shifted message labels}
-\label{fig:refpoints:B}
-\end{figure}
-
-
-\section{Environments}
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{begin}\texttt{\{msc\}}\opt{titlepos}\{\emph{title}\}\texttt{...\cmd{end}\{msc\}}]
-The environment to draw msc's. The parameter \emph{title} defines the
-title of the msc. The optional parameter \emph{titlepos} defines the
-position of the title relative to the frame of the msc. Valid
-positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|c|~(center), and
-\verb|r|~(right). The default position is~\verb|l|.
-
-\item[\cmd{begin}\texttt{\{hmsc\}}\opt{titlepos}\{\emph{title}\}\texttt{...\cmd{end}\{hmsc\}}\coordargs{llx}{lly}\coordargs{urx}{ury}]
-The environment to draw \HMSC's. The parameter \emph{title} defines the
-title of the \HMSC. The optional parameter \emph{titlepos} defines the
-position of the title relative to the frame of the \HMSC. Valid
-positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|c|~(center), and
-\verb|r|~(right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The size of the
-\HMSC{} is determined by two pairs of coordinates. The coordinates
-\coordargs{llx}{lly} define the lower left corner of the \HMSC. The
-coordinates \coordargs{urx}{ury} define the upper right corner of the
-\HMSC.
-
-\item[\cmd{begin}\texttt{\{mscdoc\}}\opt{titlepos}\{\emph{title}\}\texttt{...\cmd{end}\{mscdoc\}}\coordargs{llx}{lly}\coordargs{urx}{ury}]
-The environment to draw \MSCdoc{} documents. The parameter
-\emph{title} defines the title of the \MSCdoc{} document. The optional
-parameter \emph{titlepos} defines the position of the title relative
-to the frame of the \MSCdoc{} document. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left),
-\verb|c|~(center), and \verb|r|~(right). The default position
-is~\verb|l|. The size of the \MSCdoc{} is determined by two pairs of
-coordinates. The coordinates \coordargs{llx}{lly} define the lower
-left corner of the \MSCdoc. The coordinates \coordargs{urx}{ury}
-define the upper right corner of the \MSCdoc.
-
-
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{Commands}
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{action(*)}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Draws an \emph{action}
-symbol on the instance with nickname \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt}
-defines the name of the action. The size of the action symbol is
-controlled by the \verb|\actionheight| and \verb|\actionwidth|
-lengths. The starred version adjusts the height and width of the
-action symbol to the size of the contents.
-
-\item[\cmd{arrow}\cmdarg{nm0}\opt{\coordargs{xpos${}_1$}{ypos${}_1$}$\ldots$\coordargs{xpos${}_n$}{ypos${}_n$}}\cmdarg{nm1}]
-Draws an arrow in an \HMSC{} diagram. The arrow starts at the symbol
-with nickname~\emph{nm0} and ends at the symbol with
-nickname~\emph{nm1}. The optional parameter
-\coordargs{xpos${}_1$}{ypos${}_1$}$\ldots$\coordargs{xpos${}_n$}{ypos${}_n$}
-is a list of intermediate points the arrow should pass through.
-
-\item[\cmd{changeinstbarwidth}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{wd}\}] Changes the
-bar width of instance \emph{nm} to \emph{wd}. The parameter \emph{wd}
-should be a valid \LaTeX{} length.
-
-\item[\cmd{msccomment}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Puts a
-comment at instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt} is the
-comment. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the horizontal
-position of the comment relative to instance \emph{nm}. Valid
-positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right), and all valid
-lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the comment will be
-put at \verb|\msccommentdist| units to the left or right, respectively, from
-the instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a length, the comment will be put
-\emph{pos} units from the instance axis. A negative \emph{pos} puts the
-comment to the left and a positive \emph{pos} puts it to the right of
-the instance axis.
-
-\item[\cmd{condition(*)}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{instancelist}\}] Draws a
-\emph{condition} symbol on the instances occurring in
-\emph{instancelist}. The parameter \emph{txt} defines the text to be
-placed in the \emph{condition} symbol. The parameter
-\emph{instancelist} is a comma separated list of instance
-nicknames. Note that there should be no white space between the commas
-and the nicknames; only if a nickname contains white space is a white
-space allowed in \emph{instancelist}. The starred version adjusts the
-height and width of the condition symbol to the size of the contents.
-
-\item[\cmd{coregionend}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the co-region on the instance
-\emph{nm}. This command is obsolete (see \verb|\regionend|).
-
-\item[\cmd{coregionstart}\{\emph{nm}\}] Starts a co-region on the instance
-\emph{nm}. This command is obsolete (see \verb|\regionstart|).
-
-\item[\cmd{create}\{\emph{msg}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{creator}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{na}\}\{\emph{in}\}]
-Instance with nickname \emph{creator} sends a create message with
-label \emph{msg} to instance \emph{nm}. Instance \emph{nm} should be a
-dummy (invisible) instance at the time of the create message, see
-\cmd{dummyinst}. The head symbol of \emph{nm} is drawn at
-\verb|\msc@currentheight|. The parameter \emph{an} (above name) is put
-above the head symbol. The parameter \emph{in} (inside name) is put
-inside the head symbol. \emph{nm}'s y-position is set to
-\verb|\msc@currentheight| $+$ \verb|\instheadheight|. The optional
-parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position of the message label. Valid
-values are \verb|t| and~\verb|b|, denoting a label position on top of
-the arrow and a label position below the arrow, respectively. The
-optional parameter \emph{placement} defines the relative position of
-the message label along the message arrow. Valid values are real
-numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$, where~$0$ corresponds to the
-beginning of the arrow and~$1$ corresponds to the end of the
-arrow. The default value is~$0.5$.
-
-\item[\cmd{declinst(*)}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{an}\}\{\emph{in}\}]
-Defines an instance with nickname \emph{nm}. The starred version
-makes a \emph{fat instance}. The x-position is \verb|\instdist| to the
-right of \verb|\msc@currentwidth|. The head symbol of the instance is
-drawn at \verb|\msc@currentheight|. The parameter \emph{an} (above
-name) is put above the head symbol. The parameter \emph{in} (inside
-name) is put inside the head symbol. The
-instance y-position is set to \verb|\msc@currentheight| $+$ \verb|\instheadheight|.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{drawframe}\{\emph{str}\}] A command to turn on/off the
-drawing of the frame around msc's, hmsc's, and mscdoc's. If \emph{str}
-is `yes', the frame will be drawn, otherwise the frame will not be
-drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{drawinstfoot}\{\emph{str}\}] A command to turn on/off
-drawing of instance foot symbols. If \emph{str} is `yes', the foot
-symbols will be drawn, otherwise they will not be drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{drawinsthead}\{\emph{str}\}] A command to turn on/off
-drawing of instance head symbols. If \emph{str} is `yes', the head
-symbols will be drawn, otherwise they will not be drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{dummyinst(*)}\{\emph{nm}\}] Defines a \emph{dummy instance}
-with nickname \emph{nm}. The starred version makes a \emph{fat
-instance}. The x-position is \verb|\instdist| to the right of
-\verb|\msc@currentwidth|. No head symbol is drawn. The
-instance y-position is undefined.
-
-\item[\cmd{found}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{gate}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}]
-Draws a \emph{found message} to instance \emph{nm}. The \emph{label}
-parameter defines the message name. The \emph{gate} parameter defines
-the gate name. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position
-of the message relative to instance \emph{nm}. Valid positions are
-\verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position is
-\verb|l|. The optional parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position
-of the message label with respect to the arrow. Valid values are
-\verb+t+ (on top) and \verb+b+ (below). The default value is \verb+t+.
-The optional parameter \emph{placement} defines the relative position
-of the message label along the message arrow. Valid values are real
-numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$, where~$0$ corresponds to the
-beginning of the arrow and~$1$ corresponds to the end of the
-arrow. The default value is~$0.5$. The length of the arrow is
-determined by \verb+\selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{gate(*)}\opt{\emph{hpos}}\opt{\emph{vpos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a gate at instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt} defines
-the name of the gate. The starred version produces a visible gate by
-drawing a black circle at instance \emph{nm}. The unstarred version
-produces an invisible gate. The position of the parameter \emph{txt}
-is controlled by the optional parameters \emph{hpos} and \emph{vpos}:
-\emph{hpos} defines the horizontal position relative to instance
-\emph{nm} and \emph{vpos} defines the vertical position relative to
-the current height (\verb|\msc@currentheight|). Valid horizontal
-positions are \verb|l|~(left) and \verb|r|~(right). The default
-horizontal position is~\verb|l|. Valid vertical positions are
-\verb|t|~(top), \verb|c|~(center), and \verb|b|~(bottom). The default
-vertical is~\verb|t|.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmsccondition}\cmdarg{nm}\cmdarg{txt}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}]
-Draws an \HMSC{} condition symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}. The \emph{txt} parameter is placed inside the
-condition symbol.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconnection(*)}\cmdarg{nm}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}] Draws
-an \HMSC{} connection symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}. The unstarred version produces an invisible
-connection symbol. The starred version produces a visible connection
-symbol (i.e., a small circle).
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscendsymol}\cmdarg{nm}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}] Draws an
-\HMSC{} end symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmsckeyword}] The \HMSC{} keyword. The default value is `hmsc'.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmsckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kw}\}] A one-parameter command to
-typeset the \HMSC{} keyword. The command can expect \verb|\hmsckeyword| to
-be the value of \emph{kw}. The default `value' is \verb|\textbf|.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreference}\cmdarg{nm}\cmdarg{txt}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}]
-Draws an \HMSC{} reference symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}. The \emph{txt} parameter is placed inside the
-condition symbol.
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbol}\cmdarg{nm}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}]
-\HMSC{} start symbol with nickname \emph{nm} at position
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}.
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineend(*)}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the matching inline
-expression (matching means equal nicknames). The unstarred version
-draws a solid line to close the inline expression. The starred version
-draws a dashed line to close the inline expression.
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineseparator}\{\emph{nm}\}] Draws an inline separator
-line at the inline expression with nickname \emph{nm}. The separator
-is drawn at \verb|\msc@currentheight|.
-
-\item[\cmd{inlinestart}\opt{\emph{lo}}\opt{\emph{ro}}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{fi}\}\{\emph{li}\}]
-Defines an \emph{inline expression} with nickname \emph{nm}. The
-inline expression is started at \verb|\msc@currentheight| and
-continues until the level where a matching \cmd{inlineend} command is
-found (matching means equal nicknames). The \emph{txt} parameter
-defines the text of the inline expression. The first instance of the
-inline expression is \emph{fi}. The last instance of the inline
-expression is \emph{li}. The optional parameter \emph{lo} defines the
-left and right overlap of the inline expression. If the second
-optional parameter, \emph{ro}, is present, \emph{lo} defines the left
-and \emph{ro} defines the right overlap.
-
-\item[\cmd{inststart}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{an}\}\{\emph{in}\}] Starts
-instance with nickname \emph{nm}. Instance \emph{nm} should be a dummy
-(invisible) instance at the time of the \cmd{inststart} command, see
-\cmd{dummyinst}. The head symbol is drawn at
-\verb|\msc@currentheight|. The parameter \emph{an} (above name) is put
-above the head symbol. The parameter \emph{in} (inside name) is put
-inside the head symbol. The instance y-position is set to
-\verb|\msc@currentheight| $+$ \verb|\instheadheight|.
-
-\item[\cmd{inststop}\{\emph{nm}\}] Stops instance with nickname
-\emph{nm}. The foot symbol is drawn at \verb|\msc@currentheight|. The
-instance y-position is undefined after this command.
-
-\item[\cmd{lost}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{gate}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}]
-Draws a \emph{lost message} from instance \emph{nm}. The \emph{label}
-parameter defines the message name. The \emph{gate} parameter defines
-the gate name. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position
-of the message relative to instance \emph{nm}. Valid positions are
-\verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position is
-\verb|l|. The optional parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position
-of the message label with respect to the arrow. Valid values are
-\verb+t+ (on top) and \verb+b+ (below). The default value is \verb+t+.
-The optional parameter \emph{placement} defines the relative position
-of the message label along the message arrow. Valid values are real
-numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$, where~$0$ corresponds to the
-beginning of the arrow and~$1$ corresponds to the end of the
-arrow. The default value is~$0.5$. The length of the arrow is
-determined by \verb+\selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{measure(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm1}\}\{\emph{nm2}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Puts a \emph{measure} at instances \emph{nm1} and \emph{nm2}. The
-parameter \emph{txt} defines the label of the measure. The starred
-version puts the triangular measure symbols outside the measure; the
-unstarred version puts the triangular measure symbols inside the
-measure. The optional \emph{pos} parameter defines the horizontal
-position of the measure relative to instances \emph{nm1}
-and~\emph{nm2}. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right),
-and all valid lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the
-measure will be put at \verb|\measuredist| units to the left or right,
-respectively, from the closest instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a
-length, the measure will be put \emph{pos} units from the closest
-instance axis. A negative \emph{pos} puts the measure to the left and
-a positive \emph{pos} puts it to the right of the instances. The
-optional parameter \emph{offset} defines the number of levels the
-measure should extend vertically. The default value for \emph{offset}
-is~1.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{measureend(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{gate}\}]
-Puts a \emph{measure end} symbol at instance \emph{nm}. The starred
-version puts the triangular measure symbol outside the measure; the
-unstarred version puts the triangular measure symbol inside the
-measure. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the label of the
-measure. The \emph{gate} parameter defines the name of the gate of the
-measure end symbol. The optional \emph{pos} parameter defines the
-horizontal position of the measure relative to the
-\emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right), and
-all valid lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the
-measure will be put at \verb|\measuredist| units to the left or right,
-respectively, from the instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a length, the
-measure will be put \emph{pos} units from the instance axis. A
-negative \emph{pos} puts the measure to the left and a positive
-\emph{pos} puts it to the right of the instance.
-
-\item[\cmd{measurestart(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{gate}\}]
-Puts a \emph{measure start} symbol at instance \emph{nm}.The starred
-version puts the triangular measure symbol outside the measure; the
-unstarred version puts the triangular measure symbol inside the
-measure. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the label of the
-measure. The \emph{gate} parameter defines the name of the gate of the
-measure start symbol. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the
-horizontal position of the measure relative to instance
-\emph{nm}. Valid positions are \verb|l|~(left), \verb|r|~(right), and
-all valid lengths. If the position is \verb|l| or~\verb|r|, the
-measure will be put at \verb|\measuredist| units to the left or right,
-respectively, from the instance axis. If \emph{pos} is a length, the
-measure will be put \emph{pos} units from the instance axis. A
-negative \emph{pos} puts the measure to the left and a positive
-\emph{pos} puts it to the right of the instance.
-
-\item[\cmd{mess(*)}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\opt{\emph{labelpos}}\{\emph{sender}\}\opt{\emph{placement}}\{\emph{receiver}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws a message from \emph{sender} instance to \emph{receiver}
-instance. The starred version draws a dashed line arrow, instead of a
-solid arrow. This can be used to distinguish method calls from method
-replies. The \emph{sender} and \emph{receiver} may be the same
-instance, in which case the message is a \emph{self message}. The
-parameter \emph{label} defines the message name. The message starting
-y-position is \verb|\msc@currentheight| and the ending y-position of
-the message is defined by \verb|\msc@currentheight| $+$
-$(\textit{offset}\ \times $ \verb|\levelheight|$)$. The optional
-parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of self messages with
-respect to the instance axis. Valid values are \verb+l+ (left) and
-\verb+r+ (right). The default value is \verb+l+. The optional
-parameter \emph{labelpos} defines the position of the message
-label. In case of a self message, valid values are \verb|l| and
-\verb|r|, denoting a label position left from the arrow and right from
-the arrow, respectively. For self-messages the default value of
-\verb+labelpos+ is the value of \verb+pos+. In case of a non-self
-message, valid values are \verb|t| (default) and \verb|b|, denoting a
-label position on top of the message arrow and below the message
-arrow, respectively. The optional parameter \emph{placement} defines
-the relative position of the message label along the message
-arrow. Valid values are real numbers in the closed interval $[0,1]$,
-where~$0$ corresponds to the beginning of the arrow and~$1$
-corresponds to the end of the arrow. The default value is~$0.5$. The
-default value of the optional parameter \emph{offset} is~0 for normal
-messages and~1 for self messages.
-
-\item[\cmd{messarrowscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale
-factor (a real number) of message arrow heads. The default value
-is~1.5
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdate}] The date of the \mscpack.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdockeyword}] The \MSCdoc{} keyword. The default value is `mscdoc'.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdockeywordstyle}\{\emph{kw}\}] A one-parameter command to
-typeset the mscdoc keyword. The command can expect \verb|\mscdockeyword| to
-be the value of \emph{kw}. The default `value' is \verb|\textbf|.
-
-
-
-\item[\cmd{msckeyword}] The \MSC{} keyword. The default value is `msc'.
-
-\item[\cmd{msckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kw}\}] A one-parameter command to
-typeset the \MSC{} keyword. The command can expect \verb|\msckeyword| to
-be the value of \emph{kw}. The default `value' is \verb|\textbf|.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscmark}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Puts a
-mark at instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{txt} is the name of
-the mark. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the horizontal and
-vertical position of the mark relative to instance \emph{nm} and the
-current height \verb|\msc@currentheight|. Valid positions are
-\verb|tl|~(top-left), \verb|tr|~(top-right), \verb|bl|~(bottom-left),
-and \verb|br|~(bottom-right). The default position is \verb|tl|. The
-horizontal distance between the mark and the instance is defined by
-\verb+\markdist+.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscunit}] A string denoting the (default) unit of all
-lengths used by the \mscpack. Valid values are \emph{cm},
-\emph{em}, \emph{ex}, \emph{in}, \emph{mm}, \emph{pt}, etc. The
-default value is~\emph{cm}.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscunit}\{\emph{unit}\}] Changes the value of
-\cmd{mscunit} into \emph{unit}. Valid values for \emph{unit} are
-\emph{cm}, \emph{em}, \emph{ex}, \emph{in}, \emph{mm}, \emph{pt}, etc.
-
-\item[\cmd{mscversion}] The version number of the \mscpack.
-
-\item[\cmd{nextlevel}\opt{\emph{offset}}] Increases the number of
-levels by the value of the optional parameter \emph{offset}. The
-default value of \emph{offset} is~1. Increasing the level number means
-that \verb|\msc@currentheight| is increased by $\textit{offset} \times
-\verb|\levelheight|$. The first time this macro is used, the actual
-increase of \verb|\msc@currentheight| is $\verb|\firstlevelheight| +
-((\textit{offset} - 1) \times \verb|\levelheight|)$. Negative values
-of \emph{offset} back up a number of levels. There are situations
-where this is useful, see Section~\ref{sec:tricks}.
-
-\item[\cmd{nogrid}] Turns off grid drawing in \MSC, \HMSC, and
-\MSCdoc{} diagrams. This command should not be used inside an \MSC,
-\HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} evironment.
-
-\item[\cmd{order}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{sender}\}\{\emph{receiver}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws an \emph{order line} from the \emph{sender} instance to the
-\emph{receiver} instance. The \emph{sender} and \emph{receiver} may be
-the same instance, in which case the order is a \emph{self-order}. The
-order starting y-position is \verb|\msc@currentheight| and the ending
-y-position of the order is defined by \verb|\msc@currentheight| $+$
-$(\textit{offset}\ \times $ \verb|\levelheight|$)$. In case of a
-self-order, the optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of
-the order relative to the \emph{sender} instance. Valid positions are
-\verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position is
-\verb|l|. In case of a non-self-order, the \emph{pos} parameter is
-ignored. The default value of the optional parameter \emph{offset}
-is~0 for normal orders and~1 for self orders.
-
-\item[\cmd{reference}\cmdarg{txt}\coordargs{xpos}{ypos}] Draws an
-\MSCdoc{} reference symbol. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the text to
-be placed inside the \MSCdoc{} reference symbol. The coordinates
-\coordargs{xpos}{ypos} define the position of the reference symbol.
-
-\item[\cmd{referenceend}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the reference expression with
-nickname \emph{nm}.
-
-\item[\cmd{referencestart}\opt{\emph{lo}}\opt{\emph{ro}}\{\emph{nm}\}\{\emph{txt}\}\{\emph{fi}\}\{\emph{li}\}]
-Defines a \emph{reference expression} with nickname \emph{nm}. The
-reference expression is started at \verb|\msc@currentheight| and
-continues until the level where a matching \verb|\referenceend| command
-is found. The \emph{txt} parameter defines the text of the reference
-expression. The first instance of the reference expression is
-\emph{fi}. The last instance of the reference expression is
-\emph{li}. The optional parameter \emph{lo} defines the left and right
-overlap of the reference expression. If the second optional parameter,
-\emph{ro}, is present, \emph{lo} defines the left and \emph{ro}
-defines the right overlap.
-
-\item[\cmd{regionend}\{\emph{nm}\}] Ends the current region on
-instance \emph{nm}. The region style of the instance \emph{nm} is
-reset to \emph{normal} again. Note: this command makes
-\verb|\coregionend| obsolete.
-
-\item[\cmd{regionstart}\{\emph{rstyle}\}\{\emph{nm}\}] Starts a region
-on the instance \emph{nm}. The style of the region is defined by the
-\emph{rstyle} parameter. Valid region styles are \emph{coregion},
-\emph{suspension}, \emph{activation}, and \emph{normal}. Note: this
-command makes \verb|\coregionstart| obsolete.
-
-\item[\cmd{separator}\cmdarg{ypos}] Draws a separator in an \MSCdoc{}
-diagram. The \coordarg{ypos} parameter defines the vertical position of the
-separator in the \MSCdoc{} diagram.
-
-\item[\cmd{setfootcolor}\{\emph{color}\}] Sets the color of the foot symbols of
-\MSC{} instances. Possible values are \emph{black}, \emph{white},
-\emph{gray}, or \emph{lightgray}. For more color values, see the
-documentation of the \LaTeXe{} \textsf{color} package.
-
-\item[\cmd{sethmsckeyword}\{\emph{kw}\}] Sets the \HMSC{} keyword to
-\emph{kw}. For this command to be effective, it should be used outside
-the \HMSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{sethmsckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kwstylemacro}\}] Redefines the
-\verb|\hmsckeywordstyle| macro to the macro \emph{kwstylemacro}. This
-should be a 1-argument macro, like the standard \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{textbf} and \cmd{textit} commands. For this command to be effective, it
-should be used outside the \HMSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscdockeyword}\{\emph{kw}\}] Sets the \MSCdoc{} keyword to
-\emph{kw}. For this command to be effective, it should be used outside
-the \MSCdoc{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscdockeywordstyle}\{\emph{kwstylemacro}\}] Redefines the
-\verb|\mscdockeywordstyle| macro to the macro \emph{kwstylemacro}. This
-should be a 1-argument macro, like the standard \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{textbf} and \cmd{textit} commands. For this command to be effective, it
-should be used outside the \MSCdoc{} environment.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{setmsckeyword}\{\emph{kw}\}] Sets the \MSC{} keyword to
-\emph{kw}. For this command to be effective, it should be used outside
-the \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmsckeywordstyle}\{\emph{kwstylemacro}\}] Redefines the
-\verb|\msckeywordstyle| macro to the macro \emph{kwstylemacro}. This
-should be a 1-argument macro, like the standard \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{textbf} and \cmd{textit} commands. For this command to be effective, it
-should be used outside the \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscscale}\{\emph{scalefactor}\}] Sets the scale factor
-of the \MSC{} environment to \emph{scalefactor}. the scale factor is
-supposed to be a real number. Scaling is done when the \MSC{}
-environment ends (\verb|\end{msc}|). The default of \emph{scalefactor}
-is~1.
-
-
-\item[\cmd{setmscvalues}\{\emph{size}\}] Sets the msc-lengths to one
-of the predefined \emph{sizes}. Valid values for \emph{size} are:
-\verb|small|, \verb|normal|, and \verb|large|.
-
-\item[\cmd{setstoptimer}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws both a \emph{timer} and a \emph{stop timer} symbol on the
-instance \emph{nm}. The parameter \emph{label} defines the name of
-the timer. The optional parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of
-the \emph{timer} relative to the \emph{nm} instance. Valid positions
-are \verb|l| (left) and \verb|r| (right). The default position
-is~\verb|l|. The horizontal distance between the timer symbol and the
-instance axis is defined by \verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{settimeout}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}\opt{\emph{offset}}]
-Draws a \emph{timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm} and connects the
-\emph{timer} symbol and the instance with an arrow. The parameter
-\emph{label} defines the name of the \emph{timer}. The optional
-parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of the \emph{timer} relative
-to the \emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and
-\verb|r| (right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The optional
-parameter \emph{offset} defines the number of levels between the
-\emph{timer} symbol and the point where the arrow meets the \emph{nm}
-instance. The default \emph{offset} is~2. The horizontal distance
-between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{settimer}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a \emph{timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm}. The parameter
-\emph{label} defines the name of the timer. The optional parameter
-\emph{pos} defines the position of the \emph{timer} relative to the
-\emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and \verb|r|
-(right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The horizontal distance
-between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{showgrid}] Turns on grid-drawing in \MSC, \MSCdoc, and \HMSC{}
-diagrams. This is useful to determine the values of the user definable
-lengths or if normal \textsf{pstricks} commands should be included in
-the diagram. (Note that the vertical axis of the \MSC{} grid has no positive
-labels.) This command should not be used inside an \MSC,
-\HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} evironment.
-
-\item[\cmd{stop}\{\emph{nm}\}] Stops the instance with nickname
-\emph{nm}. The instance line of \emph{nm} is drawn from its y-position
-to the current y-position of the \MSC{} (\verb|\msc@curentheight|). At
-the current height, a \emph{stop} symbol is drawn.
-
-\item[\cmd{stoptimer}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a \emph{stop timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm}. The
-parameter \emph{label} defines the name of the timer. The optional
-parameter \emph{pos} defines the position of the \emph{timer} relative
-to the \emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and
-\verb|r| (right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The horizontal
-distance between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\item[\cmd{timeout}\opt{\emph{pos}}\{\emph{label}\}\{\emph{nm}\}]
-Draws a \emph{timer} symbol on the instance \emph{nm} and connects the
-symbol and the instance with an arrow. The parameter \emph{label}
-defines the name of the timeout. The optional parameter \emph{pos}
-defines the position of the \emph{timer} symbol relative to the
-\emph{nm} instance. Valid positions are \verb|l| (left) and \verb|r|
-(right). The default position is~\verb|l|. The horizontal distance
-between the timer symbol and the instance axis is defined by
-\verb+selfmesswidth+.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{User definable lengths}
-
-This section lists the user-definable lengths of the \mscpack. For
-each length, the default values for large, normal, and small diagrams
-are given. The appearance of \MSC, \HMSC, and \MSCdoc{} diagrams can be
-changed by adjusting these lengths. Use the normal \cmd{setlength}
-command to change these lengths.
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{actionheight}]
-Height of action symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{actionwidth}]
-Width of action symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.25}{1.25}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{bottomfootdist}]
-Distance between bottom of foot symbol and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.7}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{commentdist}]
-Distance between a comment and its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.5}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionheight}]
-Height of condition symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{conditionoverlap}]
-Overlap of condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{envinstdist}]
-Distance between environments and nearest instance line.\\
-(\lnsvalue{2.5}{2.0}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{firstlevelheight}] Height of level just below head
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.375}{0.3}{0.25} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconditionwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} condition symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{0.8}{0.7} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscconnectionradius}]
-Radius of \HMSC{} connection symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.06}{0.05}{0.04} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferenceheight}]
-Height of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.8}{0.7}{0.6} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscreferencewidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.6}{1.4}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{hmscstartsymbolwidth}]
-Width of \HMSC{} start symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.85}{0.7}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{inlineoverlap}]
-Overlap of inline symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instbarwidth}]
-Default width of vertical instance bars (applies to fat instances only).\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.0}{0.0}{0.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instdist}]
-Distance between instance axes.\\
-(\lnsvalue{3.0}{2.2}{1.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instfootheight}] Height of foot symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.25}{0.2}{0.15} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instheadheight}] Height of head symbols. Should not be
-changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.55}{0.5} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{instwidth}]
-Width of header and foot symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.75}{1.6}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{labeldist}]
-Distance between labels and the symbols to which they belong (for instance, message labels and arrows).\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} ex.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lastlevelheight}] Height of level just above foot
-symbols. Should not be changed inside the \MSC{} environment.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{leftnamedist}] Distance between left of the frame and
-(left of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.1} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{levelheight}]
-Height of a level.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.5}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{lostsymbolradius}]
-Radius of the lost and found symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.15}{0.12}{0.08} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{markdist}]
-Horizontal distance from a mark to its instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuredist}]
-Horizontal distance from a measure to its (closest) instance.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.0}{1.0}{1.0} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{measuresymbolwidth}]
-Width of a measure symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferenceheight}]
-Height of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.8}{0.7}{0.6} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{mscdocreferencewidth}]
-Width of reference symbol in an \MSCdoc.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.6}{1.4}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{referenceoverlap}]
-Overlap of reference symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.0}{0.75} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{regionbarwidth}]
-Width of region bars.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.5}{0.4}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{selfmesswidth}] Length of horizontal arms of self-messages,
-self-orders, lost messages and found messages as well as horizontal
-distance between instance axis and timer symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.75}{0.6}{0.4} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{stopwidth}]
-Width of the stop symbol.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.6}{0.5}{0.3} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{timerwidth}]
-Width of the \emph{timer} symbols.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.4}{0.3}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topheaddist}]
-Distance between top of head symbols and frame.\\
-(\lnsvalue{1.5}{1.3}{1.2} cm.)
-
-\item[\cmd{topnamedist}] Distance between top of the frame and
-(top of) \MSC, \HMSC, or \MSCdoc{} title.\\
-(\lnsvalue{0.3}{0.2}{0.2} cm.)
-
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{lnternal lengths}
-
-The \mscpack{} uses some scratch lengths to perform
-calculations. Below, these scratch lengths are listed.
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\cmd{msc@commentdist}] Internal length to compute distance
-between comments and instances. (This length should be removed in the
-future.)
-
-\item[\cmd{msc@currentheight}]
-The current height of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{msc@currentwidth}]
-The current width of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{msc@totalheight}]
-The final height of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{msc@totalwidth}]
-The final width of the current \MSC{} environment.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@X}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Xa}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Xb}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Xc}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Xd}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Y}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Ya}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Yb}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Yc}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@Yd}]
-Scratch length for intermediate computations.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-\section{Internal boxes}
-
-\begin{defs}
-
-\item[\cmd{mscbox}]
-The box that contains the current \MSC{} just before it is put on paper.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmp@box}]
-Scratch box for intermediate computations
-\end{defs}
-
-
-\section{Internal counters}
-
-\begin{defs}
-\item[\cmd{mscinstcnt}] The \MSC{} instance counter. This counter is
-increased each time an instance is created.
-
-\item[\cmd{tmpcnt}] Scratch counter for intermediate computations.
-
-\end{defs}
-
-\section{Limitations}
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-
-\item The frames in an MSC do not automatically scale with the text
-inside the frame. However, the size of the frames can be set manually.
-
-\item Start and end points of messages are computed at the current
-level. This can give ill-looking effects if the width of the bar of an
-instance changes after the message is drawn, e.g., if an activation
-region starts or ends after the message is drawn.
-
-\item Messages that cause the start of a region should be drawn after
-the \verb|\regionstart| command, but in the same level.
-
-\item Messages that denote the end of a region should be
-drawn before the \verb|\regionend| command.
-
-\item Activation regions make crossing messages partly invisible. A
-solution for this problem is to first draw the instance foot symbols
-at the right level (using \verb|\inststop{i}|), then back up the total
-number of levels of the MSC (using \verb|\nextlevel[-n]|), and then
-drawing the messages.
-
-
-\item Documents using the \mscpack{} cannot be compiled with
-\emph{pdflatex}. The reason for this is that \textsf{pstricks} is not
-supported by \emph{pdflatex}.
-
-\item The source code of the \mscpack{} is only marginally
-documented. Therefore, changes/improvements by others are unlikely.
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Tricks}
-\label{sec:tricks}
-
-In this section we describe some tricks to use the \mscpack{}
-efficiently.
-
-\paragraph{Multi-line text arguments}
-Many graphical objects in \MSC{} diagrams have text labels. In general,
-the commands to draw these objects put the text arguments on one
-line. If the text should consist of multiple lines, the \LaTeX{}
-\cmd{parbox} command can be used. For instance, to generate a message
-with a two-line label, write:
-
-\verb|\mess{\parbox{1cm}{two\\lines}}{s}{r}|
-
-
-\paragraph{Specifying lengths}
-The \mscpack{} imports the \textsf{calc} package in order to have a
-more natural syntax for arithmetical expressions. Consequently, if a
-command expects a \LaTeX{} length argument, it is possible to use the
-expression syntax offered by \textsf{calc}.
-
-For example, consider the \MSC{} of
-Figure~\ref{fig:specifying:lengths}. To make sure the comment for
-instance~$j$ appears 1ex to the right of the \MSC{} frame, the value
-of the optional \emph{pos} parameter of the \cmd{comment} command
-should be
-\[ \cmd{instdist} + \cmd{envinstdist} + 1\textrm{ex}. \]
-
-To express this in normal \LaTeX, one should write something like
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newlength{\l}
-\setlength{\l}{\instdist}
-\addtolength{\l}{\envinstdist}
-\addtolength{\l}{1ex}
-\msccomment[\l]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-inside the \MSC{} code. However, using \textsf{calc}'s expression
-syntax, it is also possible to write
-\begin{verbatim}
-
-\msccomment[\instdist + \envinstdist + 1ex]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\end{verbatim}
-The complete code for the diagram of
-Figure~\ref{fig:specifying:lengths} is given below. Since the
-\textsf{calc} package is included in the standard \LaTeX{}
-distribution, there should be no compatibility problems.
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-\begin{msc}{Specifying lengths}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\nextlevel
-\msccomment[\instdist + \envinstdist + 1ex]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-
-\caption{Specifying lengths}
-\label{fig:specifying:lengths}
-\end{center}
-\end{figure}
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Specifying lengths}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\nextlevel
-\msccomment[\instdist + \envinstdist + 1ex]{Comment for $j$}{j}
-\nextlevel[2]
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\paragraph{Level backup}
-It is possible to back-up several levels: just use a negative value in
-the \cmd{nextlevel} command. This \emph{feature} can be useful to draw
-messages over regions instead of regions over messages. Compare the
-diagrams of Figure~\ref{fig:level:backup}. The code for these diagrams
-is given below.
-
-\begin{figure}[htb]
-\begin{center}
-\setmscvalues{small}
-\begin{tabular}{cc}
-\begin{msc}{Invisible message label}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-
-&
-
-\begin{msc}{Level backup makes it visible}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[-2]% backing up
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]% fast forward
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{tabular}
-
-\caption{Level back-up}
-\label{fig:level:backup}
-\end{center}
-
-\end{figure}
-
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{msc}{Invisible message label}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-
-
-\begin{msc}{Level backup makes it visible}
-\declinst{i}{$i$}{}
-\declinst{j}{$j$}{}
-\declinst{k}{$k$}{}
-
-\regionstart{activation}{j}
-\nextlevel[3]
-\regionend{j}
-\nextlevel[-2]% backing up
-\mess{Message a}{i}[0.25]{k}[2]
-\nextlevel[2]% fast forward
-\nextlevel
-\end{msc}
-\end{verbatim}
-}
-
-\bibliographystyle{plain}
-\bibliography{biblio}
-
-\end{document}
-